Home

Samsung SL-M4580FX User Manual

1. The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document For Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 66 example you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a 2 Click the Advanced tab and select the desired watermark from the document Watermark drop down list lt _ r Watermark Message Allows users to enter the watermark which is the 4 user want to print Image file Allows users to load the watermark image which is the user want to print There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine They can Watermark name Allows users to enter the watermark name for adding be modified or you can add new ones to the list ta linially Shap Sows First Page Only Prints watermark only on the first page Not checked by default KA e Header You can add the selected text to the Top left Top center or Top right Footer You can add the selected text to the Bottom left Bottom center 3 Click OK or Print until you exit the print window or Bottom right Creating a watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 66 2 From the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list 3 Printing Using special print features 3 Enter a text message in the W
2. KA If you want to see the imaging unit you need to remove the toner cartridge a Optional feature 1 Introduction 22 Control panel overview Control panel a Display screen w 3 Shows the current machine status and prompts during an operation You can set menus easily using the display screen 2 a PowerLED Shows the power status of your machine b Power Wakeup button Turn the power on or off When the blue LED is on the machine is powered on and you can use it If you turn the machine off press this button for more than two seconds and then confirmation window appears Status LED Shows the status of your machine see Understanding the LEDs on page 26 When you use the display screen use your finger only The screen may be damaged with a sharp pen or anything else Adusting angle of the control panel You can adjust the angle of the control panel for your convenience Refer to the illustration below E When moving or storing the machine press the unlock button to fold down the control panel The unlock button is located on the top side of the control panel 1 Introduction 23 Connecting a network cable This machine has a bulit in network interface card You can connect your machine to a network using a network cable IR ge te 1 Introduction 24 Turning on the machine A Keep in mind that
3. Linux You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to install the printer software http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads Installing the Unified Linux Driver You must log in as a super user root to install the machine software If you are not a super user ask your system administrator 9 10 11 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Copy Unified Linux Driver package to your system Open Terminal program and go to the folder that you copied the package to Extract the package Move to uld folder Execute install sh command If you re not logged in as root execute the command with sudo as sudo install sh Proceed with installation When installation finished launch printing utility Go to System 5 Administration 5 Printing or execute system config printer command in Terminal program Click Add button Select your printer Click Forward button and add it to your system 1 Introduction CI Reinstalling the driver If the printer driver does not work properly follow the steps below to reinstall 4 Insert the software CD into your CD ROM drive and install the driver the driver again see Installing the driver locally on page 39 EE 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs 5 Samsung Printe
4. SetIP program 323 setting up 304 wireless network setup 320 network filtering 311 N up printing Windows 74 n up printing Mac 87 O optional tray 235 ordering 235 original document loading in the document feeder 47 on the scanner glass 45 overlay printing create 80 delete 81 print 81 P paper size 59 paper type 60 poster print postScript driver troubleshooting power save print mobile OS mobileprint print media card stock envelope guidelines labels output support paper tab in printer preferences preprinted paper setting the paper size setting the paper type special media printer preferences Linux printer properties opening printer preferences printer status general information 74 231 284 338 338 58 56 49 57 249 68 58 59 59 55 89 66 173 printing changing the default print settings 84 changing the print percentage 77 duplex 162 292 fitting your document to a selected paper size 77 Linux 89 Mac 87 margin 162 292 multiple pages on one sheet of paper Mac 87 Windows 74 network printing 309 paper orientation 162 292 poster 74 printing a document Windows 64 printing on both sides of paper Mac 88 Windows 76 printing to a file 86 setting as a default machine 85 UNIX 91 using direct printing utility 82 using overlay 80 Index using watermarks 78 printing a document Linux 89 Mac 87 UNIX 91 problem operating system problems 227 problems
5. Country Region Customer Care Center WebSite ALGERIA wn samy ng com n_africa support ARGENTINE 0800 333 3733 www samsung com ar support ARMENIA 0 800 05 555 www samsung com support AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www samsung com au support AUSTRIA 0800 SAMSUNG 0800 www samsung com 7267864 at support AZERBAIJAN 0 88 555 55 55 www samsung com support 8000 GSAM 8000 4726 www samsung com ae support English BAHRAIN pp g www samsung com ae_ar support Arabic BELARUS 810 800 500 55 500 www samsung com support BANGLADESH 09612300300 www samsung com in support 02 201 24 18 www samsung com be support Dutch BELGIUM www samsung com be fr support French BOLIVIA 800 10 7260 www samsung com HHP 4828210 cl support BOSNIA 051 331 999 www samsung com support BOTSWANA 8007260000 www samsung com support 0800 124 421 Demais cidadese www samsung com regi es br support BRAZIL pp 4004 0000 Capitais e grandes centros BULGARIA 800 111 31 be3nnatHa www samsung com TenecpoHHa NNHNA bg support BURUNDI 200 www samsung com support CAMEROON 7095 0077 www samsung com africa_fr support Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 358 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 WebSite www samsung com ca support English Country Region CYPRUS Customer Care Center 8009 4000 only from landlin
6. Comma Separated Values CSV A type of file format CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications The file format as it is used in Microsoft Excel has become a de facto standard throughout the industry even among non Microsoft platforms DSDF Collation is a process of printing a multiple copy job in sets When collation is selected the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies Control Panel A control panel is a flat typically vertical area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed They are typically found in front of the machine A Dual Scan Document Feeder DSDF is a scanning unit that will automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state reset or initialized Glossary Glossary DHCP DPI A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a client server networking protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting generally information required by the client host to participate on an IP network DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts DIMM Dots Per Inch DPI is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing Generally higher DPI results in a higher resolution more visible det
7. Log Viewer You can view delete and search log files Maintenance tab This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware managing applications and setting contact information for sending emails You can also connect to the Samsung website or download manuals and drivers by selecting the Link menu Firmware Version You can check the firmware version used in the machine Check the version and update it if necessary This feature is also available from the machine see Machine Details on page 301 Application Management You can add or delete applications license If you add an application you need to activate the license of the installed application Some applications may not have a license This feature is also available from the machine see Application Management on page 293 Backup Restore You can backup the machine s configurations and restore the configuration when there is a problem with the machine The saved backed up files can also be used to configure other machines Contact Information You can view contact information To change the information see Contact Information on page 302 Link You can view links to useful websites where you can View product information and get support Samsung website download manuals and drivers order consumable supplies register your machine on line 8 Management Tools 165 j Easy Capture Manager 2 e Available for Windows OS users
8. The machine initially has three home screens You can place application icons on any page From the main home screen swipe left or right The main home screen is located in the center and three additional pages are located on each side Navigating the application menus By default this machine has several application menus available in the main home screen If you want to access all application menus and widgets tap the Hi icon and swipe the screen left or right KU From the main home screen swipe left or right The main home screen is located in the center 1 Introduction EJ Display screen and useful menu Accessing recently used apps Adding a shortcut from the home screen You can easily find any app that you used recently 1 Tap the ESM icon to go to the main home screen Touch and hold the home screen to view a list of available shortcuts to Tap the E icon from anywhere to open the recently used select from applications window Set wallpaper 2 Tap an application s icon in this window to open it Home Screen Set the wallpaper for the Home Screen Login Screen Set the wallpaper for the Login Screen To use EO this feature you may need to log in as an administrator Customizing your home screen Home and Login Screens Set the wallpaper for both screens f To use this feature you may need to log in as an administrator You can customize your home screen to suit your needs Apps
9. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window The selected overlay prints on your document KA The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay Deleting a page overlay You can delete page overlays that you no longer use 1 2 Ul In the Printing Preferences window click the Advanced tab Select the Print Overlay from the Overlay drop down list Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Overlay List select Load from the Overlay List Select the overlay file you want to delete Click Delete When a confirming message window appears click Yes Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window 3 Printing GI Using direct printing utility This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print PDF files without A You cannot print PDF files that are restricted Deactivate the printing There are several ways you can print using the Direct Printing Utility restriction feature and retry printing You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password Deactivate r er one the pasword feanii and Natry panting From the Direct Printing Utility window Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program depends on how the PDF file was created 1 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs The Direct Printing Util
10. KU If important data is stored in the Box we recommend you to backup the data regularly Samsung disclaims all responsibility for damage or loss of data caused by misuse or failure of the machine Report Settings The paper source setting specifies the default paper tray that the machine uses to print reports Application Management You can install or uninstall applications license If you add an application you need to activate the license of the installed application Some applications may not have a license Tap Settings gt Application Management from the home screen or Apps 9 You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click the Maintenance tab gt Application Management see Application Management on page 293 e Some models may not support this feature 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 293 Admin Settings Installing an application Uninstalling an application 1 Tap Install button 1 Select the application you want to uninstall and tap Uninstall 2 A pop up window with folders appear Select the application file and 2 A confirmation window appears Press Yes press OK The application you selected is uninstalled 3 A verification message appears Read the agreement and check I accept terms of the License Agreement and press OK Application
11. Refer to the Plain paper section print media weight Capacity Tray1 Optional tray 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib bond Multi purpose tray 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib bond Preprinted Letter Legal Oficio US Folio A4 JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive A5 Statement Refer to the Plain paper section 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond Bond Letter Legal Oficio US Folio A4 JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive A5 Statement Refer to the Plain paper section 105 to 120 g m 28 to 32 Ib bond 105 to 120 g m 28 to 32 Ib bond Colored Cotton Punched Paper Letter Legal Oficio US Folio A4 JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive A5 Statement Refer to the Plain paper section 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond Letterhead9 Letter Legal Oficio US Folio A4 JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive A5 Statement Refer to the Plain paper section 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond 11 Appendix 251 Specifications Type Size print media weight Capacity Dimensions Tray1 Optional tray Multi purpose tray Archive Letter Legal US Folio Refer to the Plain paper section 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond A4 JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive A5 Statement PostCard 4 x6 PostCard 100 x 148 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond Minimum size custom 76 2 x 127 mm 3 x5 inches
12. This menu appears whenever the machine is processing a job Detail Tap this button to see the status type and time of the job M Paper Source Preview Area Allows you to see a preview of the document being copied The image in the preview area indicates the current send settings such as the orientation and size of the printout The paper source option sets the tray for this print job The machine prints the scanned image on the paper in the selected tray You can see icons that represent paper sizes and the amount of paper remaining in each tray Send Feedback Allows you to send feedback about the current send job If you want to receive sending job by email you can set from My page app see Understanding the My Page menu on page 37 55 Duplex You can set the machine to print copies on both sides of paper Tousethis feature you may need to log in as an administrator see Log in on page 280 4 Copying Understanding the copy screen You can select the Original and Output binding type either type is Book or Sets the machine to sort the copy job For example if you make 2 copies of a 3 Calendar page original one complete 3 page document will print followed by a second complete document 1 Sided For originals or output binding type that are printed on one side P g only e Collated Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals 2 Sided Book For originals or output binding type that are printed
13. Button Name Quick Menu Open the quick menu 2 Address book Open your saved address book E Fax Send a fax My Program Add an app to my program list ka Sub menu Open the sub menu Action overflow 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 108 Understanding the Scan 4 Send screen Button Name Me Virtual Hard Key Description When users are logged in the destination configured in their My Page profile appears You can set the destination in the Send to Destination menu of the My Page app see Understanding the My Page menu on page 37 Administrators can also set the default destination in the sub menu Action overflow 5 Send Settings gt Me Setting KU You must log in to use your Me destination If you do not log in then the machine sends the copy to the Me destination specified by the administrator Button Name Description KJ Reset Reset to app default configuration On Hook When you press this button you can hear a dial tone Then enter a fax number It is similar to making a call using speaker phone Stop Stop a job at any time A popup window appears to KI show the jobs that you can stop O Start Start a job Preview 2 e The positon of virtual hard keys is fixed on the right side of screen When an app is launched the virtual hard keys are shown If the screen is touched the virtual hard keys always appear If the f touched the virtual hard keys a
14. KU To prevent document jams use the scanner glass for thick thin or mixed paper originals A To avoid tearing the document remove the jammed document slowly and carefully 9 Troubleshooting 203 Clearing jams Original paper jam in front of scanner 2 e Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Variety feature on page 10 9 Troubleshooting 204 Clearing jams Original paper jam inside of scanner 2 e Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Variety feature on page 10 9 Troubleshooting 205 Clearing jams If you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to next step r 9 Troubleshooting 206 Clearing jams Original paper jam in exit area of scanner 2 e Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Front view on page 21 9 Troubleshooting Understan
15. Keyboards and Input Methods Speech Allows you to set the speech settings for Voiceinput Allows you to specify the keyboard that the machine uses Default Select the default input language and method Allows you to select the language that appears on the display screen Tap Settings gt Language from the home screen or Apps then select the language what you want e Text to speech output Provides audible readout of text for example the contents of email messages 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 281 Machine Before using the machine set up the general settings K e Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine e Click the Help from the home screen or quick menu and then click on any option you want to know about Tap Settings gt Machine from the home screen or Apps Feature Tray Settings Description Allows you to adjust the current tray settings such as the paper type and tray priorities see Tray settings on page 282 Sound Allows you to set the volume for button sound notice alarm and sounds occurring during fax job You can test the volume right after you set the level see Sound on page 283 Display Allows you to set the wallpaper brightness and quick launch Storage Management all application s storage Adjustment Allows you to adjust altitude h
16. Power saver This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use ventilation When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of P P time power consumption is automatically lowered ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U S marks Mercury Safety For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http www energystar gov Contains Mercury Dispose According to Local State or Federal Por ENERGY STAR corned models the ENRGY STAR ARAI wil beon las USAD your machine Check if your machine is ENERGY STAR certified Recycling Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR Manganese Dioxide A P P ang p Q environmentally responsible manner Perchlorate warning Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California USA Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate U S A only 11 Appendix 258 Regulatory information China only BCA PER a ie E ct lead A A FH FA At Applicable in countries with separate collection YEMEN iN WN SEE mABR SYstems Pelz RAY A EARS Website http www samsung com cn support location supportServiceLocation do page SERVICE LOCATION Correct disposal of this product Waste electrical amp electronic equipment prod
17. Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Motor Failure error number Turn off then on Call for service if the problem persists There is a problem in the motor system Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service 9 Troubleshooting 209 Understanding display messages Message Original paper jam in front of the scanner Meaning The originals are jammed in Dual scan document feeder Suggested solutions Clear the jam see Original paper jam in front of scanner on page 204 Message Paper Jamin exit area Meaning Paper has jammed in the exit area Suggested solutions Clear the jam see In the exit area on page 199 Original paper jam inside of the scanner The originals are jammed in Dual scan document feeder Clear the jam see Original paper jam inside of scanner on page 205 Paper Jam inside of machine Paper has jammed inside of the machine Clear the jam see In tray1 on page 192 or In optional tray on page 193 or Inside the machine on page 196 Paper in output bin is full Remove printed paper The output tray is full Remove printouts from the output tray the machine resumes printing Paper jamin tray 1 Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the
18. 10 Supplies and Accessories 236 j Installing accessories Disconnect the power cord When you install the optional devices such as optional tray memory etc this Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on machine automatically detects and sets the optional devices If you cannot use the optional devices you installed in this driver you can set the optional devices To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock always disconnect the power i in Device Options cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories Disch icel Penal ee auc etectichy 1 Click the Windows Start menu The control board and internal accessories network interface card or memory module are sensitive to static electricity Before installing or removing any internal accessories discharge static electricity from your body by touching something metal such as the metal back plate on any device plugged into a grounded power source If you walk around before For Windows 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and finishing the installation repeat this procedure to discharge any static Sound gt Printers electricity again For Windows 8 from the Charms select Search gt Settings 2 For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers A When installing accessories the battery inside the machine is a service compo
19. 3 Change default printing options or connection type 4 Click Apply button 3 Printing EJ Unix printing 5 Press OK to start the print job Some features may not be available depending on models or options It means that the features are not supported see Features by model on Ha E E 7 page Changing the machine settings The UNIX printer driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various 5 EO rint options in printer Properties Proceeding the print job ibaba j j The following hot keys may also be used H for Help O for OK A for Apply and C for Cancel After installing the printer choose any of the image text or PS files to print 1 Execute printui lt file_name_to_print gt command General tab For example if you are printing document1 Paper Size Set the paper size as A4 Letter or other paper sizes according printui document1 f to your requirements This will open the UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various print options Paper Type Choose the type of the paper Options available in the list box are Printer Default Plain and Thick Select a printer that has been already added Paper Source Select from which tray the paper is used By default it is Auto Selection Select the printing options from the window such as Page Selection Orientation Select the direction in which information is printed on a page
20. Control panel overview Connecting a network cable Turning on the machine Understanding the LEDs Display screen and useful menu Understanding the pop up keyboard Installing the driver locally Reinstalling the driver Key benefits Environmentally friendly To save toner and paper this machine supports Eco feature To save paper you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper To save paper you can print on both sides of the paper double sided printing To save electricity this machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use We recommend using recycled paper for saving energy Fast high resolution printing You can print with a resolution of Up to 1200 x 1200 dpi effective output 1200 x 600 x 2 bit Fast on demand printing For single side printing up to 45 ppm A4 or up to 47 ppm Letter Convenience You can print on the go from your smartphone or computer using Google Cloud Print enabled apps Easy Capture Manager allows you to easily edit and print whatever you captured using the Print Screen key on the keyboard Samsung Easy Printer Manager and Printing Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine s status and allows you to customize the machine s settings Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan compile and save documents in multiple formats including epub format These
21. Forwarding faxes You can set your machine to forward sent or received faxes to email SMB FTP and so on If you are out of the office but need to receive faxes this feature may be useful General fax settings You can set the default fax options Set the most frequently used fax settings Tap Settings gt Fax Settings on the display screen Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or y models If so it is not applicable to your machine Click the v Help from the home screen or quick menu and then click on any option you want to know about e You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open a web browser from a networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click Settings tab gt Machine Settings gt Fax see Settings tab on page 162 Option Description Machine ID amp Fax No You can set the machine ID and fax number to be printed at the top of each page 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 139 Receiving a fax Option Redial Description Set the machine to re dial the fax number if the recipient s fax line is busy or not answered Set the number of re dial attempts and the interval between attempts e Redial Term Select terms for re dialing using the up down arrows e Redial Times Select a re dial time using the up down arrows Select 0 to disable redialing Prefix Dial Set the number to
22. Replacing the imaging unit 9 Troubleshooting 189 Replacing the imaging unit 9 Troubleshooting 190 i Tips for avoiding paper jams By selecting the correct media types most paper jams can be avoided When a paper jam occurs refer to the next guidelines Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly see Loading paper in the tray on page 50 Do not overload the tray Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing Flex fan and straighten paper before loading Do not use creased damp or highly curled paper Do not mix paper types in a tray Use only recommended print media see Print media specifications on page 249 9 Troubleshooting 191 Clearing jams KA To avoid tearing the paper pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently In tray Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 9 Troubleshooting 192 Clearing jams In optional tray 9 e Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 e This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Variety feature on page 10 9 Troubleshoot
23. Select how many copies are needed in Number of Copies lt Duplex Print on both sides of paper to save paper To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver press Properties R WRN 3 Printing EI Unix printing Printer Specific Settings tab Automatic manual duplex printing may not be available depending on modei vou can aternatively naa the Ipr printing system or other Select various options in the JCL and General frames to customize various ap picgUons ar OUA EVEN PANUNG settings These options are specific to the printer and depend on the PPD file Multiple pages Print several pages on one side of the paper Page Border Choose any of the border styles e g Single line hairline Double line hairline Image tab In this tab you can change the brightness resolution or image position of your document Text tab Set the character margin line space or the columns of the actual print output Margins tab Use Margins Set the margins for the document By default margins are not enabled The user can change the margin settings by changing the values in the respective fields Set by default these values depend on the page size selected Unit Change the units to points inches or centimeters 3 Printing 92 4 Copying This chapter gives you step by step instructions for copying documents Understanding the copy screen Basic copying Quick copying ID card co
24. or fax Only users with multi functional printers photos documents and web pages directly from your smartphone or tablet Printing 1 Check that NFC and Wi Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile device and Wi Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer IL Open Samsung Mobile Print app N Ki For some mobile devices NFC tag might not be located at the back of the WA mobile device Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile device before tagging If you do not have Samsung Mobile Print installed on your cellphone go to the application store Samsung Apps Play Store App Store on your mobile device and just search for download the app and try again 7 Follow the instruction on the mobile device s screen 3 Select print mode 4 Select the content you want to print If necessary change the print option by pressing the Fo icon 3 Network Setup 334 Using the NFC feature Optional Tag your mobile device usually located on the back of the mobile Scanning device over the NFC tag nec on your printer Wait a few seconds for the mobile device to send a job to the printer q Check that NFC and Wi Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile E device and Wi Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer Open Samsung Mobile Print app N KA If you do not have Samsung Mobile Print installed on your cellphone go to the application store Samsung Apps Play Store App
25. Green and Yellow Earth Blue Neutral Brown Live If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug do the following You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter E or by the safety Earth symbol or colored green and yellow or green You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter N or colored black You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter L or colored red 11 Appendix 264 Regulatory information You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug adaptor or at the distribution board Declaration of conformity European countries Approvals and Certifications Hereby Samsung Electronics declares that this M458x series is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC CE The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www samsung com go to Support 5 Download center and enter your printer MFP name to browse the EuDoC January 1 1995 Council Directive 2006 95 EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment January 1 1996 Council Directive 2004 108 EC approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility March 9 1999 Council Directive 1999 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conf
26. IPSec KU You can enable and configure these options in SyncThru Web Service only see Security tab on page 163 Description You can disable IPSec if it is turned on in SyncThru Web Service Network Filtering You can disable network filtering options if it is turned on in SyncThru Web Service IPSec You can disable IP security settings Network Filtering MAC Filtering Disable MAC filtering IPv4 Filtering Disable IPv4 filtering IPv6 Filtering Disable IPv6 filtering NFC You can on off NFC The NFC feature is available when the optional Wireless NFC kit installed see Using the NFC feature Optional on page 328 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 300 System Machine Details Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your You can check the detailed machine information Check the status of installed Click the Help from the home screen or quick menu and hardware and software versions to help you maintain the machine You can download the latest software from the Samsung website http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads then click on any option you want to know about H W Configuration Shows the status of installed hardware including optional parts Date and Time e Capabilities Shows the capabilities of the hardware Software Versions Shows th
27. This feature allows you to print dark images lighter or light images darker k Sub menu Action overflow Photo Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images Tap Darkness to show the slider control Add to my program Add an app to my program list With this feature user can set default settings destinations required for each program Also can set _ LES default options as Auto Launch add shortcut to Home Search Search for a desired options 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 128 Understanding the fax screen Build Job This option can be turned on or off When this option is on After the scanning is finished the Scan More window appears to ask if you want to scan another page If you select Yes then you can scan another page in the current job If you select No then the scanning process is completed and the remainder of the job is performed Attach File Only Allows you to attach a file to your message You can use this option to quickly send one or more files from the hard disk drive BOX of the machine to an SMB FTP Email Box USB Save as Default Allows you to save the current Scan 8 Send settings as the default Scan amp Send settings After you save the default Scan amp Send settings all future send tasks use these settings Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to save the current settings as the default Scan amp Send settings Restore Default Allows you to restore the Scan amp Se
28. This feature is also available from the machine see Authentication on page 289 Authorization Giving rights You can give permissions to a user to only use certain features of the machine Authority Management You can give different rights to different users For example you can allow user A to use all the machine s functions while giving user B only the right to print Accounting You can manage accounts User profile You can store user information on the machine s hard drive You can use this feature to manage the users using the machine You can also group the users and manage them as a group You can add up to 1 000 entries User identified by user ID and password are allowed to modify their password They are allowed to view all of their profile information When it comes to the role users are allowed to see only the role they belong to but not its permissions 8 Management Tools 164 SyncThru Web Service System Log You can keep logs of events that have happened in the machine The administrator can record and manage the machine usage information by keeping the system log files The system log files are stored on the machine s HDD hard disk drive and when it is full it will erase old data Export and save the important audit data separately using the exporting feature Log configuration You can enable or disable keeping logs You can also backup log files by periods and transfer to a repository server
29. User permission If you check this option only users with user permission can start a print job Group permission If you check this option only groups with group permission can start a print job If you want to encrypt job accounting password check Job Accounting Password Encryption e Custom Paper Size Settings You can specify custom paper size Click OK until you exit the Properties or Printer properties window 10 Supplies and Accessories 238 Installing accessories Upgrading a memory module Your machine has a dual in line memory module DIMM Use this memory module slot to install additional memory We recommend the use of only genuine Samsung DIMM s You may void your warranty if it is determined that your machine problem is being caused by third party DIMM s The order information is provided for optional accessories see Available accessories on page 235 10 Supplies and Accessories 239 Installing accessories After installing the optional memory you can use the advanced printing features such as proofing a job and specifying of printing a secure print job in the printer properties window You can control the active job queue and file policy see Using Box on page 181 10 Supplies and Accessories 240 Checking replaceable s lifespan If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems check the remaining lifespan of Consumables Replace the corresponding parts if necessary 1 Tap
30. download and unpack the UNIX Printer 8 Run installprinter from the command line This will bring up the Add Driver package to your computer Printer Wizard window Setup the printer in this window referring to the following procedures Acquire root privileges aii 2 On some UNIX OS for example on Solaris 10 just added printers may not be enabled and or may not accept jobs In this case run the following two commands on the root terminal Copy the appropriate driver archive to the target UNIX computer accept cprinter name See administration guide of your UNIX OS for details i p enable lt printer_name gt Unpack the UNIX printer driver package For example on IBM AIX use the following commands Uninstalling the printer driver package gzip d lt enter the package name tar xf the unpacked directory KA The utility should be used to delete the printer installed in the system a Run uninstallprinter command from the terminal Run the install script It will open the Uninstall Printer Wizard The installed printers are listed in the drop down list Select the printer to be deleted install i install is the installer script file which is used to install or uninstall the UNIX Printer Driver package Click Delete to delete the printer from the system Execute the install d command to uninstall the whole package Dano Use chmod 755 install command to give the
31. encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space As most faxes consist mostly of white space this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes MMR Modified Modified READ MMR is a compression method recommended by ITU TT 6 Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information MR Modified Read MR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 4 MR encodes the first scanned line using MH The next line is compared to the first the differences determined and then the differences are encoded and transmitted Glossary Glossary NetWare OSI A network operating system developed by Novell Inc It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack Today NetWare supports TCP IP as well as IPX SPX OPC Organic Photo Conductor OPC is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer and it is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage in the printer and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from contact with the cartridge development brush cleaning mechanism and paper Originals The first example of something such as a document p
32. imaging unit on page 189 Shake toner cartridge and then install Replace toner cartridge if the problem persists Small amount of toner is left in the indicated cartridge You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner see Redistributing toner on page 185 If the problem persists call for service The room temperature is not suitable for this set use Please adjust room temperature The machine isin a room with improper room temperature Please adjust room temperature see Specifications on page 247 9 Troubleshooting aaa Understanding display messages Message Toner Cartridge Failure error number Call for service Meaning There is a problem in the toner cartridge Suggested solutions Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Toner cartridge is not installed Install the cartridge A toner cartridge is not installed Reinstall the toner cartridge Toner cartridge is not compatible Check users guide The imaging unit you have installed is not for your machine Install aSamsung genuine imaging unit designed for your machine see Available consumables on page 234 Top door of scanner is open The Dual scan document feeder cover is not securely latched Close the cover until it locks into place tray number cassette is pulled out Insert insert it proper
33. paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use 9 Troubleshooting BO Solving other problems Condition The machine prints but the text is wrong garbled or incomplete Possible cause The machine cable is loose or defective Suggested solutions Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect Try a print job that you have already printed successfully If possible attach the cable and the machine to another computer that you know works and try a print job Finally try a new machine cable The wrong printer driver was selected Check the application s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected Condition The machine does not print PDF file correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations Possible cause Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products Suggested solutions Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options If the PDF file do not include the font or do have the object which is Try printing a job from Printer Driver The software application is malfunctioning Try printing a job from another application The operating system is malfunctioning Exit Windows and reboot the computer Turn the machine off and back on again are missing set on Interactive mode The print The
34. such cases you can insert a pause in the telephone number 7 Setting up an Address Book ga Using the control panel Every Month A sub folder is created every month using the name format YYYY MM for example 2014 01 Every Year A sub folder is created every year using the name format YYYY for example 2014 Create Group for Multiple Files If you select this option and scan multiple files the machine creates a sub folder in the file folder you selected to store all sent files If all folder creation options are enabled at the same time sent files are stored as below When a single scanned file is sent folder user name 2014 01 01 DOC jpg When multiple scanned files are sent folder user name 2014 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC000 jpg folder user name 2014 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC001 jpg folder user name 2014 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC002 jpg 7 Tap Done to save the information Editing Individual address When editing a contact tap a field to change or delete the information or add additional fields to the contact s information 1 Tap Address book gt Contacts on the home screen or Apps Tap the name of individual you want to edit Tap edit 2 If you want to delete an individual address check the box of that address and tap NA Sub menu Action overflow 5 Delete Contacts Tap the input field for the information you want to change The pop up keyboard appears allowing you t
35. while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots Mass storage device HDD Mass storage device HDD commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk is a non volatile storage device which stores digitally encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE The term 1284 B refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral for example a printer Intranet A private network that uses Internet Protocols network connectivity and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization s information or operations with its employees Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service the internal website IP address An Internet Protocol IP address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard Glossary Glossary IPM ITU T The Images Per Minute IPM is a way of measuring the speed of a printer An IPM rate indicates the number of single sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute IPP The Internet Printing Protocol IPP defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs media size resolution and so forth IPP can be used locally or over the Internet t
36. 1 21 G general icons 14 general settings 281 282 287 295 297 glossary 366 google cloud printing 341 group group address 146 H HTTP settings 163 l id copy 105 inner view 22 IPP settings 162 J jam Index Index clearing jam 192 tips for avoiding paper jams 191 JPEG USB scanning memory device 145 150 K keyboard understanding the keyboard 38 L LED machine status 26 28 understanding the status LED 26 link 165 Linux common Linux problems 230 driver installation for network connected 317 printer properties 89 printing 89 scanning 121 system requirements 255 linux scanning 121 loading in the document feeder 47 originals on the scanner glass 45 paper in multi purpose tray 52 paper in the tray1 50 special media 55 log 165 login 160 280 LPR LPD settings 162 M Mac common Mac problems 229 driver installation for network connected 316 driver reinstallation for USB cable connected 43 printing 87 scanning 120 system requirements 254 mac scanning 120 machine detail 301 machine protocols 310 maintenance parts 236 managing address book 162 application 165 293 user 164 managing USB memory 244 margin printing 292 memory clearing memory 348 memory upgrading 239 moving 356 multi purpose tray loading 52 tips on using 52 using special media 55 N network authentication 289 driver installation Linux 317 Mac 316 UNIX 317 Windows 312 installing environment 256 304 Index 380 Index
37. 60 to 163 g m 16 to 43 Ib bond Maximum size custom 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches O Am 2n TO If media weight is over 105 g m 28 Ib bond load a paper into the tray one by one Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight thickness and environmental conditions Envelope Monarch and Envelope C6 are not supported for optional tray Index Card is supported only multi purpose tray A6 PostCard 4 x 6 and PostCard 100 x 148 are not supported for optional tray Smoothness 100 to 250 sheffield A6 is supported only multi purpose tray tray1 11 Appendix 252 i Specifications System requirements Microsoft Windows Requirement recommended Operating system CPU RAM free HDD space Windows XP Intel Pentium Ill 933 MHz Pentium IV 1 GHz 128 MB 256 MB 1 5 GB Windows Server 2003 Intel Pentium Ill 933 MHz Pentium IV 1 GHz 128 MB 512 MB 1 25 GB to 2 GB Windows Server 2008 Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz Pentium IV 2 GHz 512 MB 2 GB 10 GB Windows Vista Intel Pentium IV 3 GHz 512 MB 1 GB 15 GB Windows 7 Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz 32 bit or 64 bit processor or higher 1 GB 2 GB 16 GB Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory to enable the Aero theme DVD R W Drive Windows Server 2008 R2 Intel Pentium IV 1 4 GHz x64 processors 2 GHz or faster 512 MB 2 GB 10 GB Windows 8 Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz 32 bit
38. AaBbCc Suggested Solutions If toner smears on the page Clean the inside of the machine Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative Check the paper type and quality see Print media specifications on page 249 Remove the imaging unit and install a new one Contact a service representative Change the image transfer belt if it has reached its lifespan Contact a service representative Vertical repetitive defects AaBbCc It AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc_ AaBbCc P If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals The imaging unit may be damaged If a repetitive mark occurs on the page run a cleaning sheet through several times to clean the imaging unit Cleaning the inside If you still have the same problems remove the imaging unit and install a new one Contact a service representative Parts of the machine may have toner on them If the defects occur on the back of the page the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages The fusing assembly may be damaged Contact a service representative Condition Background scatter Suggested Solutions Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page e The paper may be too damp Try printing with a different batch of paper Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture e If background scatter occ
39. DSDF see Loading originals on page 45 3 Open an application such as Adobe Photoshop 4 Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options 5 Scan and save your scanned images 5 Scan amp Send Scanning Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan compile and save documents in multiple formats including epub These documents can be shared over social networking sites or fax Whether you re a student organizing research from a library or a stay at home parent sharing scanned pictures from last year s birthday party Easy Document Creator will provide you with the necessary tools KA e Available for Windows OS only Requires Windows XP or higher and Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher Samsung Easy Document Creator is installed automatically when you install the machine software The Samsung Easy Document Creator provides the following features Image Scanning Use to scan single or multiple pictures Document Scanning Use to scan documents with text or text andimages Text Converting Use to scan documents that need to be saved in an editable text format Book Scanning Use to scan books with the flatbed scanner SNS Upload Use to quickly and easily upload scanned images or existing images to a variety of social networking sites SNS E Book Conversion Use to scan multiple documents together as one e book or combine existing files into an e book Plug in
40. F Preprinted paper ink must be non flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers Before you load preprinted paper verify that the ink used is compatible with Laser printers 2 Media and Tray 58 Setting the paper size and type To change detailed tray settings tap Settings 5 Tray Settings and select the tray and options you want on the display screen The paper setting in the machine and driver should match to print without a paper mismatch error To change the paper setting set in the machine from SyncThru Web Service click Settings tab gt Machine Settings gt System gt Input Tray see Settings tab on page 162 Or you can set it from the control panel Then set the paper type from the Printing preferences window gt Paper tab gt Paper Type see Opening printing preferences on page 66 After loading paper in the paper tray set the paper size and type using the display screen Machine Tray Settings E Tray Settings Paper Size Paper Type Sound Tray 1 CJ Letter Plain CI Display Tray2 Folio Plain Storage MP gt Tray L3 A4 Plain t 7 27 Adjustment Options cs Power Saver Auto Tray Switch S Timers Auto Continue Eco Paper Substitution lamas Tray Confirmation Message Tray 1 MP Tray You can set the Paper Size and Paper Type Tray 2 You can set the Paper Size and Paper Type Paper Size Allows you to change the paper size You can change t
41. KO Basic scan This is the usual procedure to scan your original documents Ul Tap Scan amp Send from the home screen or Apps Place the originals face up in the DSDF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DSDF see Loading originals on page 45 Adjust the settings in the Send tab and More tab Select a destination using Add Destination Me E Address book Email SMB FTP Box or USB You can send scanned documents to Email Fax FTP or SMB addresses through the 2 Address book The Email Fax FTP or SMB icons appear next to the contact s name in the Address book When you select a name the first icon is selected by default To send documents to multiple destinations select the icons for each of the destinations Tap start Start from the control panel to begin scan To cancel the current send job tap sr then tap Job Status on the control panel and then delete the job you want see Job Status on page 34 5 Scan amp Send Scanning KO Scanning with TWAIN enabled software If you want to scan documents using other software you need to use TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop Follow the steps below to scan with TWAIN compliant software 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Place the originals face up in the DSDF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the
42. Make Default option to set this printer as default 3 Network Setup 319 Wireless network setup Optional Introducing wireless set up methods You can set wireless settings either from the machine or the computer Choose the setting method from the below table KA R If you want to add wireless feature to the machine check the option lists and contact the purchasing point to order see Available accessories on page 235 When you purchase a Wireless NFC kit Wireless LAN Option install the kit by following the steps described in the Wireless Kit Wireless LAN Option Guide which is enclosed in the kit After installing the Wireless Kit Wireless LAN Option set the machine to use this feature Make sure your machine supports wireless networking Wireless networking may not be available depending on the model see Features by model on page 8 Wireless networks require higher security so when an access point is first set up a network name SSID the type of security used and a Network Password are created for the network Ask your network administrator about this information before proceeding with the machine installation 9 Some wireless network installation types may not be available depending on the model or country It is strongly recommended that you set the password on Access Points If you do not set the password on Access Points they might be exposed to illegal access from unknown machines including P
43. Scan and fax directly from the Microsoft Office program 2 Click Help in the upper right corner of the window then click on any option you want to know more about Scanning with Samsung Easy Document Creator Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan compile and save documents in multiple formats including epub format 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 45 From the Windows Start menu click Programs or All Programs Click Samsung Printers and run Samsung Easy Document Creator Click Scan from the home screen Select the type of scanning or a favorites then click Start Make adjustments to the image Scan Settings and More Options Click Scan to scan a final image or Prescan to get another preview O N A UU AWN Select Save to Location Send to E mail or Send to SNS 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 118 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 9 Click Save to save the scanned image Send to email the scanned image or Share to upload the scanned image K If there is room on the scanning glass you can scan more than one item at atime Use the tool to define multiple selection areas 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 119 Mac scanning Scanning from USB connected machine 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Place a single doc
44. Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click Settings tab gt Machine Settings gt Fax see Settings tab on page 162 Print Settings You can set print related settings When there is no specific input for printing options the machine prints with the settings you set here Set the frequently used printing settings This feature can be useful if your company has a specific printing form 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 292 Admin Settings Tap Settings gt Print Settings from the display screen KU You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click the Settings tab gt Machine Settings gt Printer see Settings tab on page 162 Box Settings You can store documents print download and sent from computers or scanned images in the Box The Box is located on your machine s hard disk drive HDD It means the documents are stored on the HDD You can create a password for a certain Stored Document so unauthorized users cannot access it Also you can print stored documents by using a variety of printing features and send the documents to several destination such as email server or fax You can set a Stored Document and use Stored Document feature with SyncThru Web Service
45. Store on your mobile device and just search for download the app and try again 3 Select scan mode 4 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on A For some mobile devices NFC tag might not be located at the back of the page 49 ll 4 mobile device Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile If necessary change the scan option by pressing the Fo device before tagging 6 The printer starts printing 3 Network Setup 335 Using the NFC feature Optional 5 Tag your mobile device usually located on the back of the mobile Sending Fax device over the NFC tag Nec on your printer Wait few seconds for the mobile device to send a job to the printer q Check that NFC and Wi Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile device and Wi Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer Open Samsung Mobile Print app N KA If you do not have Samsung Mobile Print installed on your cellphone go to the application store Samsung Apps Play Store App Store on your mobile device and just search for download the app and try again 3 Select fax mode 4 Select the content you want to send fax If necessary enter the fax number and change the fax option by pressing For some mobile devices NFC tag might not be located at the back of the i mobile device Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile the fo ic
46. Terminal program Printing always works with duplex This duplex issue was in Ubuntu 9 10 CUPS package Update CUPS version to 1 4 1 5ubuntu2 2 Printer is not added through system s printing utility The problem occurs on Debian 7 due to the defect in system config printer package of the Debian 7 http bugs debian org cgi bin bugreport cgi bug 662813 in Debian bug tracking system Please use another way to add printer CUPS WebUI for example Paper size and orientation are disabled in the Print Dialog when opening text files The problem occurs on Fedora 19 and it s related to leafpad text editor on Fedora 19 Please use other text editors like gedit KA Refer to the Linux User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages 9 Troubleshooting 230 i Solving other problems Common PostScript problems The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are used Problem The PostScript file cannot be printed Possible cause The PostScript driver may not be installed correctly Solution e Install the PostScript driver Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for printing If the problem persists contact a service representative Limit Check Error report prints The print job was too complex You might need to reduce the complexity of the page or install more
47. XOA Apps Widgets and Programs Place apps XOA apps widgets and program icons on home screen Creating shortcuts Folder Create a folder on the home screen Shortcuts are different from widgets While widgets can only launch Page Add another page to the home screen applications shortcuts can do this and activate features and actions Adding a shortcut from the Apps menu 1 Tapthe KGG icon to go to the main home screen 2 Tapthe EH icon to view your current applications 3 Scroll through the list and locate the desired application 1 Introduction 31 Display screen and useful menu 4 Touch and hold the application icon This creates a shortcut to the application and shows the main home screen 5 Drag the shortcut to a desired position on the screen and release it To move to a different page drag the shortcut to the edge of the screen until the screen scrolls to the desired page Deleting a shortcut 1 Touch and hold a shortcut until it becomes movable 2 You can drag shortcut and place a shortcut in the trash both items turn red KA This action does not uninstall a program it only removes the shortcut from the home screen Adding and removing widgets Widgets are self contained applications that reside on your widgets tab and on any page of the home screen Unlike shortcuts a widget appears as an on screen application Adding a widget 1 2 3 4 5 Tap the fi icon to go to the main ho
48. a es ER 5 icati O To open the application From the Start screen select the Samsung Printer Experience Ez tile P 3 Printer This area gives you general information about your The Samsung Printer Experience interface comprises various useful features as f Information machine You can check information such as the described in the following table 1 me R pod machine s status location IP address and remaining toner level 8 Management Tools Using Samsung Printer Experience 2 User s Guide You can view the online User s Guide You need to be connected to the Internet to use this feature KA This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs You can directly open the troubleshooting section in the user s guide Order Supplies Click on this button to order replacement toner cartridges online You need to be connected to the Internet to use this feature Visit Samsung Links to Samsung printer website You need to be connected to the Internet to use this feature Printer Settings You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup paper layout emulation networking and print information through SyncThru Web Service Your machine needs to be connected to a network This button will be disabled if your machine is connected via USB cable Device List amp Latest Scanned 6 Image The scan list displays dev
49. be useful when handling large amounts of data If Samsung tab you select this setting the printer spools the document into the mass storage device and then prints it from the mass storage device queue decreasing the computer s work load Use the Samsung tab to display the copyright and the version number of the driver If your computer is connected to the Internet you can have access to Print Schedule Select this setting to print the document at a specified time services Job Name This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel Print Mode e User ID This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel The user name automatically appears as the user name that you use to log on Windows This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing file by using the HDD in your machine The default Print Mode is Normal which is for printing without storing the printing file on the HDD You can also use this option in other tabs Enter Password If the Property of the stored documents you selected is Secured you have to enter the password for the stored document This option is used for loading a stored file using the control panel e Confirm Password Re enter the password to confirm it e Normal This mode prints without storing your document in the optional memory e Proof This mode is useful when you print more than one copy You can print one copy
50. booklet 2 Sided Originals Calendar Copy each side of an original to one page of a booklet The second side of each original is rotated 180 degrees so the text will be upright in the booklet Book Copy Use this feature to copy a book If the book is too thick lift the DSDF until its hinges are engaged by the stopper then close the DSDF If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm 1 18 inches start copying with the DSDF open 4 Copying ao Understanding the copy screen This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass Off Disables this feature Left Page Prints only the left page of the book Right Page Prints only the right page of the book Both Pages From Left Prints both facing pages from the left page Both Pages From Right Prints both facing pages from a right page Book Center amp Edge Erase Erases shadows caused by bindings or book edges from the center and side edges of copies Duplex Erases shadows caused by bindings or book edges from the center nd side edges of copies E Poster Copy This feature allows you to print a single page document onto 4 9 or 16 sheets of paper for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster size document A This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass 4 Image Repeat This option prints several copies of the original image on the same side of a single page
51. can occur and cause damage to the machine When using the machine for a long period of time or printing a large number of pages in a non ventilated space it could pollute the air and be harmful to your health Place the machine in a well ventilated space or open a window to circulate the air periodically Do not place the machine on an unstable surface The machine could fall causing injury or machine damage 1 Introduction Safety information Use only No 26 AWG or larger telephone line cord if necessary d Q id aa ia Maintenance Checking Otherwise it can cause damage to the machine Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical outlet A Caution Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the inside of the machine Do not clean the machine with benzene paint thinner or alcohol do not spray water directly into the machine Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe Q operation If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters 6 feet with a 110V machine then the gauge should be 16 AWG or larger Otherwise it can cause damage to the machine and could result in electric shock or fire This could result in electric shock or fire f a O When you are working inside the machine replacing Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight A f ae f p consumables or
52. cleaning the inside do not operate the machine location such as a closet Ps You could get injured If the machine is not well ventilated this could result in fire g J Keep cleaning consumables away from children O Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords O a This can diminish performance and could result in electric shock PU Caren canid gebnurg or fire Th J O Do not disassemble repair or rebuild the machine by yourself e machine should be connected tothe power level which is ae l B B O specified on the label It can damage the machine Call a certified technician when the i machine needs repairing If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using contact the electrical utility company To clean and operate the machine strictly follow the user s guide provided with the machine a AWG American Wire Gauge Otherwise you could damage the machine 1 Introduction 18 Safety information Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean from dust or water Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire When storing consumables such as toner cartridges keep them away from children Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested O e Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with screws e Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service technician Repair by non certified technicians could
53. copying problems 223 faxing problems 225 paper feeding problems 214 power problems 213 printing quality problems 218 scanning problems 224 touch screen 214 Q quick copy 104 R Raw TCP IP settings 162 rear view 22 regulatiory information 257 report 295 demo page 295 requirements SyncThruTM Web Service 159 S safety information 15 symbols 15 samsung printer experience 175 Samsung Printer Status 173 scan email server 162 scanner glass 45 loading documents 45 scanner glass loading documents 45 scanning Linux scanning 121 Mac 120 TWAIN 117 searching address book 147 security system security settings user authentication serial number server settings service contact numbers SetIP program settings copy current DNS ethernet fax gernal 281 282 287 295 HTTP machine margin network printer scan security network server server for printing 163 289 347 303 358 323 162 161 306 306 162 297 163 162 292 306 162 162 163 163 303 309 Index sound 283 connecting to 159 replacing the cartridge 187 SyncThruTM Web Service 163 copy 162 replacing toner 346 TCP IPv4 306 external authentication server 164 sending a toner notification 345 tray 282 fax 162 toner unit WINS 307 information tab 161 sending the toner reorder notification 345 sound 283 log 165 touch screen specifications 247 maintenance tab 165 problem solving 214 print media 249 network 162 tray stored doc
54. current status pressing the Printer Status button see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 173 3 Printing 66 Opening printing preferences Listed items help you choose pre defined settings KA The screenshot may differ depending on model r m _ Printing Preferences A Favorites Basic Paper Graphics Advanced Eco Samsung N4 Last Used Setting le enables you to print with last used pages on kOpsors Preview 45 Detais Letter mm 8 50 x 11 00 inches inch _ i Ca Ga Basic tab to set various printing options Orientation Layout Options This option allows you to select the direction in which information is printed on Poster Printing See Printing posters on page 74 Booklet Printing See Printing booklets on page 75 This option allows you to select various ways to layout your document Single Page Per Side This option is a basic layout option This option allows you to print a page on one side of a paper Multiple Pages Per Side See Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper on page 74 Page Border This option allows you to print your document on which border line is This option is not available for Poster Printing and Booklet 3 Printing Opening printing preferences Double Sided Printing Paper Options This option allows you to print on both sides of paper see Printing on both e Original Size This o
55. entries include in the group Tap Done when you are finished You can delete addresses currently stored in the address book Tosearchfora contact tap the search field in the Add contact screen Enter the first few letters of a contact s name or tap the Q search icon to show WA To use this feature you may need to log in as an administrator see Log in all contacts In the list that appears check the boxes for the contacts you on page 280 want to add and tap Done ngaa 1 Tap Address book gt Contacts or Groups on the home screen or Apps 5 To remove an individual address from the group check the box for that EER address and tap delete 2 Check the boxes of the addresses you want to delete and tap tap aba Sub menu Action overflow gt Delete Contacts 6 Tap Done to save the information 7 Setting up an Address Book Using the control panel Tap OK in the confirmation window and the selected addresses are deleted from the address book Viewing the address book You can browse for individual addresses and groups Tap Address book on the home screen or Apps 1 2 Tap an address to see more information about it 2 You can tap FAC when viewing an address to edit its information directly or when viewing an address group to see a list of that group s members 7 Setting up an Address Book 148 Using SyncThru Web Service You can store addresses conveniently from the networked co
56. from the Chrome browser Make sure the printer is turned on and connected to a wired or wireless network that has access to the Internet The following steps are an example of using the Chrome browser Run Chrome Printing from an application on mobile device Open the document or email that you want to print The following steps are an example of using the Google Docs app from Click the wrench icon W in the browser s top right corner Android mobile phone Click Print A new tab for printing appears 1 Install the Cloud Print application on your mobile device Select Print with Google Cloud Print Click the Print button Aa ub W N WA If you do not have the application download it from the application store such as Android Market or App Store 3 Network Setup ga 4 Maintenance This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine Monitoring the supplies life Setting supplies reorder notification Replacing amp redistributing supplies Finding the serial number Clearing memory Cleaning the machine Tips for storing machine supplies and paper Tips for moving the machine Printing a demo page Monitoring the supplies life Check remaining life of the supplies and prepare the supplies in advance You can also print the supplies life report Select Supplies Information in the Report feature see Report on page 295 Information tab on page 161 From the machine 1 Tap S
57. memory A PostScript error page prints The print job may not be PostScript Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job Check to see whether the software application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine The optional tray is not selected in the driver The printer driver has not been configured to recognize the optional tray Open the PostScript driver properties select the Device Options tab and set the tray option When printing a document in Mac with Acrobat Reader 6 0 or higher colors print incorrectly The resolution setting in the printer driver may not be matched with the one in Acrobat Reader Make sure that the resolution setting in your printer driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader 9 Troubleshooting 231 10 Supplies and Accessories This guide provides information on purchasing Consumables accessories and maintenance parts available for your machine Ordering supplies and accessories 233 Available consumables 234 Available accessories 235 Installing accessories 237 Available maintenance parts 236 Checking replaceable s lifespan 241 Using a USB Drive device 242 WA Available accessories may differ from country to country Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available accessories Ordering supplies and accessories 2 Available accessories may differ from country to country Contact your sales representatives to obt
58. networked computer Click Yu and the search results appear po Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in the browser for example http 123 123 123 123 N You can see the addressesin a specific category such as Fax Number Email SMB etc La Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service page For example if you want to see the addresses which are included fax number click drop down list below LDAP and select Fax Number Click Login Enter your ID and password and select a domain to log in to Exporting Address Book Click Login Click Address Book You can import the address book saved in the machine to the computer in CSV file format using SyncThru Web Service You can sort the address book by clicking each column header For example 1 Access the SyncThru Web Service see SyncThru Web Service on click Speed No to sort the addresses by speed dial number Click a column page 159 a second time to reverse the sort order ia NOU BW 2 Click Address Book tab gt Individual 7 Setting up an Address Book 152 Using SyncThru Web Service 3 Select Export from the Task drop down list Fax This field is not mandatory You can enter up to 40 byte using numbers 0 9 and special characters 4 Select the option you want and click the Export button Email This field is not mandatory You can enter up to 128 byte in il f pri in Then the address book file stored in
59. occurred message appear Samsung Printer Experienceis Samsung Printer Experience is not installed Download the app from the Windows Store and install it not shown when you click more settings Machine information is not Check the Printer properties Click the Ports tab displayed when you click the device in the Devices and Printers Control Panel gt Devices and Printers gt Right click on your printer icon and select Printer properties If the port is set to File or LPT uncheck them and select TCP IP USB or WSD KA Refer to the Microsoft Windows User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages 9 Troubleshooting 228 i Solving other problems Common Mac problems Condition Suggested solutions The machine does not print PDF Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options files correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations are missing KA It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image Some letters are not displayed Mac OS cannot create the font while printing the cover page The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on normally during cover page the cover page printing When printing a document in Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader Mac with Acrobat Reader 6 0 or higher col
60. on Windows 7 Conventions Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably as below Document is synonymous with original Paper is synonymous with media or print media Machine refers to printer or MFP General icons Icon Text Description Gives users information to protect the machine from Caution possible mechanical damage or malfunction Used to alert users to the possibility of personal injury A Warning Fi Provides additional information or detailed Note specification of the machine function and feature 1 Introduction 14 Safety information These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and others and to prevent any potential damage to your machine Be sure to read Operating environment and understand all of these instructions before using the machine After reading this section keep it in a safe place for future reference A Warning Important safety symbols _q_ i i x Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is not grounded Explanation of allicons and signs used in this chapter This could result in electric shock or fire LIO J Do not place anything on top of the machine water small metal or heavy objects candles lit cigarettes etc i Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe Warning This could result in electric shock or fire personal injury or death e Ifthe
61. on both sides 2 Sided Calendar For originals or output binding type that are printed on both sides but the back is rotated 180 degrees Reduce Enlarge The reduce enlarge feature allows you print an image larger or smaller than the original Tap the icons on the screen to reduce a copy by 25 to 99 or enlarge a copy by 101 to 400 9b 10096 Original Prints the copy at the same size as the original Auto Reduces or enlarges the copy based on the size of the output paper O Original Size Custom You can set custom percentage between25 to 400 XY Custom You can set XY custom values between 25 to 40090 Use this option to set the actual paper size of the originals Other preset values Reduces or enlarges the copy to a preset value The e Mixed Size If the original uses a combination of both Letter and Legal size icons on the right side of the column indicate the presets to use when paper the machine can use the proper sized paper for each sheet from copying to a different paper size multiple trays For example if the original is 3 pages two Letter and one Legal the machine prints in order on the correct paper size for each page Custom size If you need to set a custom value for a special size of paper CE Finishin ilakas g use the arrows to set the required size 4 Copying o8 You can set the print output options Understanding the copy screen 5 Original Orientation Use this option to set the ori
62. on your printer Open Samsung Mobile Print Manager from your mobile device N KA If you do not have Samsung Mobile Print Manager installed on your cellphone go to the application store Samsung Apps Play Store on your mobile device and just search for download the app and try again 3 Press Import 4 Type in the ID and Password Use the same admin ID Password as when logging in from the machine A e For some mobile devices NFC tag might not be located at the back of the see Log in on page 280 mobile device Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile device before tagging While cloning the machine is locked KA If you want to create a new user or change the password see Security tab on page 163 6 Select the settings you want to apply and press OK 5 Select the settings you want to copy 7 Follow the instruction on the mobile device s screen 6 Follow the instruction on the mobile device s screen 3 Network Setup 332 Using the NFC feature Optional Tag your mobile device usually located on the back of the mobile device over the NFC tag Nec on your printer Wait few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer For some mobile devices NFC tag might not be located at the back of the mobile device Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile device before tagging LS While cloning the machine is locked Wireless Setup N You
63. one Network Name SSID in the list wireless environment please ask the person who set up your network To configure wireless parameters you can use SyncThru Web Service 8 Click Next If the wireless security setting window appears enter the registered password network password and click Next Using SyncThru Web Service 9 The confirmation window appears please check your wireless setup If Before starting wireless parameter configuration check the cable connection the setup is right click Apply status 1 Check whether or not the network cable is connected to the machine If not connect the machine with a standard network cable Turning the Wi Fi network on off 2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer Safari or Firefox and enter 1 Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine If not your machine s new IP address in the browser window connect the machine with a standard network cable For example 2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer Safari or Firefox and enter http 192 168 1 133 your machine s new IP address in the browser window For example 3 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website http 192 168 1 133 4 Typein the ID and Password 3 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website 3 Network Setup 324 Use the same login ID Password Domain as when logging in from the machine see Log in on
64. or 64 bit processor or higher 2 GB 20 GB Windows 8 1 Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory to enable the Aero theme DVD R W Drive Windows Server 2012 Intel Pentium IV 1 4 GHz x64 processors 2 GHz or faster 512 MB 2 GB 32 GB 11 Appendix 253 Windows Server 2012 R2 Specifications e Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine Mac e Users who have administrator rights can install the software Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems Operating system Requirements Recommended CPU RAM Free HDD space Mac OS X 10 5 Intel processors 512 MB 1 GB 1GB 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4 G5 Mac OS X 10 6 Intel processors 1 GB 2 GB 1GB Mac OS X 10 7 10 9 Intel processors 2 GB 4 GB 11 Appendix 254 Specifications Linux Items Requirements Operating system RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 5 6 Fedora 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 OpenSuSE 11 0 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 12 1 12 2 12 3 Ubuntu 10 04 10 10 11 04 11 10 12 04 12 10 13 04 SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 11 Debian 5 0 6 0 7 0 7 1 Mint 13 14 15 CPU Pentium IV 2 4GHz Intel Core 2 RAM 512 MB 1 GB Free HDD space 1 GB 2 GB Unix Items Requirements Operating system Sun Solaris 9 10 11 x86 SPARC HP UX 11 0 11i v1 11i v2 11i v3 PA RISC Itan
65. package to your system 2 3 Open Terminal program and go to the folder that you copied thepackage to 4 Extract the package 5 Move to uld folder 6 Execute install sh command If you are not logged in as root execute the command with sudo as sudo install sh 7 Proceed with installation 8 When installation finished launch Printing utility Go to System gt Administration 5 Printing or execute system config printer command in Terminal program 9 Click Add button 1 0 Select AppSocket HP JetDirect and enter your machine s IP address 11 Click Forward button and add it to your system 2 e Make sure your machine supports the UNIX operating system before installing the UNIX printer driver see Operating System on page 8 The commands are marked with when typing the commands do not type Kia Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country see Operating System on page 8 To use the UNIX printer driver you have to install the UNIX printer driver package first then setup the printer You can download the UNIX printer driver package from the Samsung website http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads Installing the UNIX printer driver package The installation procedure is common for all variants of UNIX OS mentioned 3 Network Setup Installing driver over the network w From the Samsung website
66. page The drum inside the printer has probably been scratched Remove the imaging unit and install a new one Contact a service representative If white vertical streaks appear on the page The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative If vertical streaks appear on the page e The surface of the scanner glass and its white sheet may be dirty Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative White Spots If white spots appear on the page The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to the inner devices within the machine so the transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative The paper path may need cleaning Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative Color or Black background AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable Change the image transfer belt if it has reached its lifespan Contact a service representative e Check the environmental conditions very dry conditions low humidity or a high level of humidity higher than 80 RH can increase the amount of background shading e Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one 9 Troubleshooting 219 i Solving other problems Condition Toner smear AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBhCc AaBbCc
67. page 126 Scan amp Send You can set scan related settings This feature is also available from the machine see Understanding the Scan amp Send screen on page 108 Box You can set box related settings This feature is also available from the machine see Using Box on page 181 Address Book Setting This address book contains contacts that are available to all users You can use the address book to make contacts available to anyone who uses the machine E mail Notification When an error occurs or the consumables are running out the machine sends a notification to the administrator via e mail You can set whether to use this feature or not You can also select which alerts to receive and when Network Settings You can set up the network environment to use your machine as a network machine You can also set the settings from the machine Refer to the network setup chapter see Network Setup on page 303 General You can set general machine information to use in the network and set ethernet settings This feature is also available from the machine see Ethernet on page 297 TCP IPv4 TCP IPv6 Raw TCP IP LPR IPP Telnet WSD SLP UPNP mDNS CIFS SNMP SNMPv1 v2 SNMPv3 You can set protocol settings This feature is also available from the machine Outgoing Mail Server SMTP You can set server settings for outgoing emails If this setting is not configured you cannot use scan to email feature Outgoing emails w
68. page 280 Wireless network setup Optional 4 Typein the ID and Password 2 e You cannot connect your mobile device to the internet through the printer s Wi Fi Direct Use the same login ID Password Domain as when logging in from the machine see Log in on page 280 The supported protocol list may differ from your model Wi Fi Direct networks do NOT support IPv6 network filtering IPSec WINS and SLP KA If you want to create a new user or change the password see Security tab AU on page 163 e The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi Fi Direct is 4 5 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens click Network Settings Setting up Wi Fi Direct 6 Click Wi Fi You can enable Wi Fi Direct feature by one of the following methods 7 You can turn the Wi Fi network on off From the machine Setting the Wi Fi Direct for mobile printing 1 Tap Settings gt Network Settings gt Wi Fi from the home screen or App 2 Type in the ID and Password Wi Fi Direct is a secure and easy to use peer to peer connection between a Wi Fi Direct enabled printer and mobile device Use the same login ID Password Domain as when logging in from the machine see Log in on page 280 With Wi Fi Direct you can connect your printer to a Wi Fi Direct network while concurrently connecting to an access point You can also use a wired network and a Wi Fi Direct network simultaneously so multiple users can acce
69. po czenia wed ug taryfy operatora PORTUGAL 808 20 7267 www samsung com pt support 1 800 682 3180 www samsung com latin support Spanish PUERTO RICO www samsung com latin_en support English QATAR www samsung com ae_ar support Arabic RWANDA 9999 www samsung com support ROMANIA 08008 726 78 64 08008 www samsung com SAMSUNG Apel GRATUIT ro support RUSSIA 8 800 555 55 55 www samsung com ru support 920021230 www samsung com sa support na a www samsung com sa en support English SENEGAL 800 00 0077 WW Seiiisy ng com africa_fr support SERBIA 011 321 6899 www samsung com rs support SINGAPORE 1800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com sg support SLOVENIA 080 697 267090 726 786 www samsung com rs si Contact SAMSUNG worldwide ga Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center 0800 SAMSUNG 0800 726 786 WebSite www samsung com Country Region Customer Care Center 0800 755 755 WebSite www samsung com SLOVAKIA TANZANIA sk support support SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com THAILAND 0 2689 3232 1800 29 3232 www samsung com support th support SPAIN 0034902172678 HHP www samsung com 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com 0034902167267 es support latin support Spanish 00941175405400094115900000 www samsung com TRINIDAD Se eP l SRI LANKA support TOBAGO www samsu
70. quality problems If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly there might be a reduction in print quality See the table below to clear the problem Condition Light or faded print Suggested Solutions If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page the toner supply is low You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life If this does not improve the print quality install a new toner cartridge The color tone might not be adjusted Adjust the color tone The paper may not meet paper specifications for example the paper may be too moist or rough see Print media specifications on page 249 If the entire page is light the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode off See the help screen of the printer driver A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning Contact a service representative The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the LSU contact a service representative Condition The top half of the paper is printed lighter than the rest of the paper AaBbCe AaBbCe AaBbCc AaBbCc Suggested Solutions The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click the Paper tab and set the paper type to
71. resolution of the Reduce the photo size If you increase quality of photo is very low the photo size in the software photos is not good Images are not clear application the resolution will be reduced If you are ina DOS environment the font setting for your machine may be set incorrectly Change the language setting Before printing the machine emits vapor near the output tray Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing This is not a problem Just keep printing Try a fresh ream of paper Pages print but they are blank The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner Redistribute the toner if necessary If necessary replace the toner cartridge The file may have blank pages Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages The machine does not print special sized paper such as billing paper Paper size and paper size setting do not match Set the correct paper size in the Custom Paper List in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences see Paper Options on page 68 Some parts such as the controller or the board may be defective Contact a service representative Your machine has an odd smell during initial use The oil used to protect the fuser is evaporating After printing about 100 color pages there will be no more smell It is a temporary issue 9 Troubleshooting Solving other problems Printing
72. result in fire or electric shock e The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service technician Supply usage A Caution Do not disassemble the toner cartridge Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested a Using recycled consumables such as toner can cause damage to the machine In case of damage due to the use of recycled consumables a service fee will be charged 9S For consumables that contain toner dust toner cartridge waste toner bottle imaging unit etc follow the instructions below e When disposing of the consumables follow the instructions for disposal Refer to the reseller for disposal instructions e Donot wash the consumables e For a waste toner bottle do not reuse it after emptying the bottle If you do not follow the instructions above it may cause machine malfunction and environmental pollution The warranty does not cover damages caused by a user s carelessness O When toner gets on your clothing do not use hot water to wash it Hot water sets toner into fabric Use cold water Do not burn any of the consumables such as toner cartridge or fuser unit This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire O When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested 1 Introduction 19 Machine overview The ac
73. select an unavailable paper size this option can be automatically canceled Select only available paper paper without 4 or gg mark Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window 3 Printing Using special print features Long Edge This option is the conventional layout used in Printing on both sides of the paper bookbinding You can print on both sides of a paper duplex Before printing decide how you want your document oriented Do not print on both sides of the special media such as labels envelopes or thick paper to print on both sides of paper It may cause a paper jam or damage the machine A 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 66 Reverse Double Sided Printing Check this option to reverse the print order when duplex printing 2 Click the Basic tab 4 Click the Paper tab select the Original size Source and Type 3 From the Double Sided Printing section select the binding option you want 5 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Printer Default If you select this option this feature is determined by the setting you ve made on the control panel of the machine This option is available only when you use the PCL printer driver None Disables this feature 3 Printing Using special print features Change the size by percentage of your document Fitting your document to a
74. selected 4 4 Select a wallpaper and tap Set wallpaper or Cancel Changing the Wallpaper You can customize the Wallpaper background of your home screens From any home screen touch and hold on an empty area of the screen and then select Set wallpaper option 2 Tap one of the following options in the window that appears Home Screen Set the wallpaper for the Home Screen Login Screen Set the wallpaper for the Login Screen To use this feature you may need to log in as an administrator Home and Login Screens Set the wallpaper for both screens To use this feature you may need to log in as an administrator 1 Introduction EF Display screen and useful menu Notification Bar The notification bar includes a pull down list to show information about currently running processes toner status screen brightness and recent notifications 16 47 10 88 188 80 Ready to Copy On the home screen touch and hold the notification bar until the pull down appears and then drag down to expand it When you tap Job Status from the home screen or Apps the screen lists Current Job Completed Job Secure Print Secure Fax and Active Notice Current Job Displays a list of jobs in progress and pending Completed Job Displays a list of the completed jobs including information about jobs in which an error has occurred Secured Print Fax Displays a list of secured jobs For secured print
75. selected paper size You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size printed page by typing in a percentage you want regardless of the document size This option can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document DO 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 66 a 2 Click the Paper tab f eee 1 To change the print settings from your software application access 3 Select actual paper size of the originals from the Original Size Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 66 4 Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box Click the Paper tab You can also click the up down arrows to select the scaling rate Select actual paper size of the originals from the Original Size Select the size of paper to be printed in the tray from the Output Size Youcamnot use this feature when you select a size of paper from the Output Size Select the Source and Type Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window aA uu bp W N 5 Select the Source and Type 6 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window 3 Printing Using special print features Using an existing watermark To change the print settings from your software application access
76. support Arabic PAKISTAN 0800 Samsung 72678 www samsung com pk support MOLDOVA 0 800 614 40 www samsung com support MONGOLIA 7 495 363 17 00 www samsung com support MONTENEGRO 020 405 888 www samsung com support MOROCCO 080 100 2255 enw sain sting sc om n_africa support MOZAMBIQUE 847267864 827267864 www samsung com support MYANMAR 01 2399888 www samsung com support NAMIBIA 08 197 267 864 www samsung com support NIGERIA 0800 7 26 7864 wav samsung com africa_en support NETHERLANDS pale SAMPUNG 0900 7267864 www samsung com NEW ZEALAND 0800 726 786 www samsung com nz support PANAMA 800 7267 800 0101 www samsung com latin support Spanish www samsung com latin_en support English Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 362 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center 009 800 542 0001 WebSite www samsung com Country Region Customer Care Center 800 CALL 800 2255 WebSite www samsung com ae support English latin support Spanish PARAGUAY www samsung com latin_en support English PERU 0 800 777 08 www samsung com pe support 1 800 10 7267864 PLDT 1 800 www samsung com PHILIPPINES 857267064 Globe landline and ph support Mobile 02 4222111 Other landline 0 801 172 678 lub 48 22 607 www samsung com 93 33 HHP 0 801 672 678 lub pl support POLAND 48 22 607 93 33 koszt
77. the Help menu or click the button from the window and click on any option you want to know about 8 Management Tools Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Alert Settings Windows only Advanced settings user interface overview This menu includes settings related to error alerting The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person responsible Printer Alert Provides settings related to when alerts will be received for managing the network and machines Email Alert Provides options relating to receiving alerts via email Alert History Provides a history of device and toner related alerts Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Job Accounting Device Settings Provides querying of quota information of the specified job accounting user This quota information can be created and applied to devices by job accounting You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup paper software such as SyncThru or CounThru admin software layout emulation network and print information Scan to PC Settings This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles Scan Activation Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the device Basic tab Contains settings related general scan and device settings Image tab Contains settings related to image altering 8 Management To
78. the book or Quality Use this option to produce a high quality document The higher magazine is thicker than 30 mm 1 18 inches start copying with the DSDF open quality you select the larger file size Off Disable this feature OCR Language When producing scanned output for OCR software select Left Page Scans only the left page of the book the appropriate language This is supported when Searchable PDF option is selected in File Format settings e Right Page Scans only the right page of the book Both Pages From Left Scans both facing pages from the left page Fax Options Both Pages From Right Scans both facing pages from the right page If you send originals that are of poor quality or contain photographs you can Book Center amp Edge Erase You can set shaded areas to erase shadows adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality fax caused by bindings or book edges from the center and side edges of copies Resolution Standard Usually recommended for originals with text This option will B Advanced Fax fax user only reduce the transmission time Set the sending options for fax such as Quick Start Fax and Delay Send Fine Recommended for the originals containing small characters thin ae ka y lines or text from a dot matrix printer e Off Disables this feature Super Fine Recommended for originals containing fine details This Quick Start Fax The machine will begin to transmit the fax right after
79. the machine is attached to the correct one Half the page is blank The page orientation The machine may be configured incorrectly setting may be incorrect Change the page orientation in your application See the printer driver help screen Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct see Opening printing preferences on page 66 The paper size and the paper size settings do not match The printer driver may be incorrectly installed Repair the machine software The machine is malfunctioning Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error Contact a service representative The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is insufficient to access the print job If printing GUI make more hard disk space available for your print and try printing the document again The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source The paper option that was selected in the Printing Preferences may be incorrect For many software applications the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the Printing Preferences Select the correct paper source See the printer driver help screen see Opening printing preferences on page 66 Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray Or ensure that the
80. the machine is receiving data from the computer When the status LED blinks rapidly the machine is printing data 1 Introduction 26 Understanding the LEDs Red Status Description On Atoner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge A paper jam has occurred e The cover is opened Close the cover e There is no paper in the tray Load paper in the tray e The machine has stopped due to a major error Check the display message An imaging unit has almost reached its estimated cartridge life It is recommended to replace the imaging unit Blinking A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared Check the display message When the problem is cleared the machine resumes its original task e The toner cartridge or imaging unit is near the end of its life Order a new toner cartridge or imaging unit You can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the toner a Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life which indicates the average capacity of print outs and is designed pursuant to ISO IEC 19752 The number of pages may be affected by operating environment percentage of image area printing interval graphics media and media size 2 Check the message on the display screen Follow the instructions in the message or refer to the troubleshooting chapter see If
81. the power cable is not connected 11 Appendix ga Specifications Print media specifications Type Plain paper print media weight Capacity Multi purpose tray 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ib bond 100 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib bond size Dimensions Tray1 Optional tray Letter 216 x 279 mm 8 5 x 11 inches 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ib bond Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches 550 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib bond US Folio 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 inches A4 210 x 297 mm 8 26 x 11 69 inches Oficio 216 x 343 mm 8 5 x 13 5 inches JIS B5 182 x 257 mm 7 16 x 10 11 inches ISO B5 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 inches Executive 184 x 267 mm 7 25 x 10 5 inches A5 148 x210 mm 5 82 x 8 26 inches Statement 140x216 mm 5 5 x 8 5 inches A6 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 82 inches Not available in optional tray Index Card 76x 127 mm 3 00 x 5 00 inches Not available in tray 1 optional tray Postcard 4 x 6 102 x 152 mm 4 00 x 6 00 inches Not available in optional tray Postcard 100 x 148 100 x 148 mm 3 94 x 5 83 inches Not available in optional tray 11 Appendix 249 i Specifications Type Envelope Size Envelope Monarch Dimensions 98 x 191 mm 3 87 x 7 5 inches Envelope No 9 98 x 225 mm 3 87 x 8 87 inches Envelope No 10 105 x 241 mm 4 12 x 9 5 inches print media weight Capacity Tray1 Optional tray 75 to 90 g m 20
82. the problem persists call for service 1 Introduction Understanding the LEDs Power LED The color of the status LED indicates the machine s current status Status Description Off The machine is off line Blue On The machine is on line and can be used Blinking The machine is in power save mode When data is received or any screen is pressed it switches to on line automatically KA Check the message on the display screen Follow the instructions in the message or refer to the troubleshooting chapter If the problem persists call for service 1 Introduction 28 Display screen and useful menu Menu navigation You can tailor the machine s range of functions to fit your needs with both menus and widgets Access features by scrolling through the available on screen menus Manual terms Tap Lightly touch the screen and release your finger For example Tap the on screen keyboard to enter characters or other text Tap a menu item to select it Tap an application s icon to launch the application Touch and hold Lightly touch and hold your finger to the screen For example Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it Touch and hold on a field to display a pop up menu of options Swipe Lightly drag your finger across the screen For example Swipe up or down ona home screen or menu to scroll it Panning Touch and hold an icon and then tilt the device left or right For ex
83. there is no input for the given time Held Job Timeout When an error occurs while printing and there is no signal from the computer the machine holds a job for a specific time period before deleting it Job Timeout When there is no input for a certain period of time the machine cancels the current job You can set the amount of time the machine will wait before canceling the job 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 285 Machine Allows you to save print resources and enables ecofriendly printing Default Eco Mode Select whether to turn the Eco mode on or off a On Forced Sets the Eco mode on If a user wants to turn the Eco mode off the user needs to enter the password Eco Features Configuration Setting the ECO fratures Default Settings The machine is set to Default Eco mode Custom Settings Change any necessary values 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 286 Admin Settings This option is only available to administrators 2 e Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine e Click the pm Help from the home screen or quick menu and then click on any option you want to know about Tap Settings gt Admin Settings from the home screen or Apps Feature Security Description Allows you to set up the security related settings see Security on page 288 Feature Print Settings Description Yo
84. view on page 21 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Lift and open the scanner lid 4 Maintenance 1353 Cleaning the machine 3 Wipe the surface of the scanner until it is clean and dry Scanner lid Scanner glass Document feeder glass White bar hWN 4 Close the scanner lid 4 Maintenance 354 Tips for storing machine supplies and paper Keep them in a cool place with no humidity Keep them covered so that dusts cannot be accumulated Keep them out of water When moving the machine do not tilt or turn it upside down Otherwise the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner which can cause damage to the machine or reduce print quality When moving the machine make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely Toner cartridge Imaging unit To get the best print quality from the toner cartridge keep the following guidelines in mind Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until it s ready to use Do not refill the toner cartridge The machine warranty does not cover damage caused by using a refilled cartridge Store toner cartridges in the same environment as your machine Keep it in a stable place so the toner dust is not slanted to one side Store print media in its ream wrapper until you are ready to use it Place cartons on pallets or shelves not on the floor Do not place heavy objects on top of the paper whether it
85. when printing If you want to print though the network you need to select the following ports Tap Settings gt Management gt Report gt Network Configuration from the home screen or Apps then tap Print KA You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine see Network settings configuring TCP IP on page 306 3 Network Setup 309 Set protocols You can enable disable the protocols Standard TCP IP LPR IPP ThinPrint CIFS SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SLP Service Location Protocol Telnet SNMP V1 V2 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv3 UPnP SSDP Protocol and mDNS Multicast Domain Name System SetIP and HTTP Tap Settings gt Network Settings gt Network Protocol from the home screen or Apps KA You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine see Settings tab on page 162 3 Network Setup gg Network filtering settings You can set your machine to prevent unlisted IP or MAC addresses from connecting to the machine You can set general network filtering settings Tap Settings gt Network Settings gt Network Security gt Network Filtering from the home screen or App K You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your
86. with group permission can start a print job Manual Margin This option allows you to specify binding margin Binding margin adjusts binding position This option is not available when you use the PS printer driver 9 e Click the question mark 99 from the upper right corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about Administrators can enable job accounting and configure permissions in If you click Reset settings in the Advanced option returns to the default the control panel or SyncThru Web Service For the detailed setting information about them refer to the Administrator s Guide Security Encrypts printing data first and transmits it to the machine This feature protects the printing information to prevent your data from being comprised on your network Job Encryption feature is enabled only when the hard drive is installed The hard drive is used to decrypt the printing data 3 Printing Opening printing preferences The Eco tab allows you to save print resources and lead you to eco friendly printing When you select Eco Printing you can see the eco image g on some options Also Some options are not available to use in the eco mode Eco Options Printer Default If you select this option this feature is determined by the setting you ve made on the control panel of the machine None Disables this option e Eco Printing Eco mode gets activated Select Double Sided Printing L
87. your computer P Jeymar tex pupieregamaim com 1 Access the SyncThru Web Service see SyncThru Web Service on Importing Address Book page 159 You can edit the exported address book in CSV file format and send it back to the machine by exporting to the machine from your computer Click Address Book tab gt Individual Select Import from the Task drop down list 2 Followings are the conditions for editing the imported CSV file Select Browse and select the stored file Password protected or security enhanced CSV file cannot be edited Click Import gt OK U A WN The CSV file needs to be saved in Notepad program in UTF 8 Do not change the first row model name version title field Use comma as a separator Grouping addresses in the address book When importing the address book data from a computer to the machine the existing address book data is deleted Open a web browser from your networked computer Make sure to enter valid data If you enter invalid data unexpected errors can occur Refer to the below rules for entering valid data 2J Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in the browser for example Speed dial A number is required for each address You cannot use http 123 123 123 123 duplicate numbers Only numbers are allowed User Name This field is not mandatory You can enter up to 64 byte 3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service page in UTF 8
88. 1 Tap Quick Copy from the home screen or Apps 2 Place the originals face up in the DSDF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DSDF see Loading originals on page 45 3 Adjust the settings Paper Source Reduce Enlarge Original Orientation Darkness Duplex N UP Collation 4 Enter the number of copies desired on the numeric keypad or button on the control panel if necessary Tap Start O on the control panel to begin copying Ul 2 To cancel the current copy job tap amp Stop gt tap Job Status on the control panel Then delete the job you want see Job Status on page 34 4 Copying 104 ID card copying Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown Then close the scanner lid Calla Your machine can print 2 sided originals on one sheet The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and E Fl the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original This 7 f feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as business card f 2 The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature Tap ID Copy from the home screen or Apps 1 2 If necessary adjust the settings for each copy such as Print Layout j Original Size Paper Source Adjust to Paper Size and Align 4 Tap Start Follow the instructions on the control panel Your machi
89. 2 This section is for the users with multi functional printers available You can skip step 5 if the Prescan option is selected Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer 8 Management Tools 180 Using Box Understanding the Box screen Command keys Documents and images printed scanned downloaded and sent from computers can be stored in the Box The Box is located on your machine s hard C When you selected files shows below meus disk drive HDD It means the documents are stored on the HDD You can create a password for a certain Stored Document so unauthorized users cannot access it Also you can print stored documents by using a variety of printing features and send the documents to several destination such as email server or fax You can set a Stored Document and Stored Document feature with SyncThru Web Service 2 e lfimportant data is stored in the Box we recommend you to backup the Button data regularly Samsung disclaims all responsibility for damage or loss of data caused by misuse or failure of the machine Print Print files directly Send Send files to Fax Email Server Box or USB Delete Delete folders and files e Click the Help from the home screen or quick menu and then click on any option you want to know about Name Description H Quick Menu Open the qui
90. 22 323 162
91. 32 iin FE SB Sy f Ki Hi N fo B na H SET NI P JIL EX CNY 4 PAZ 4 AAR DARI oy gj gan HC CO 6 ERPE rr gg CC WHR Bla AB PE FATE asm J lo lo lo lo lo aman ccocmem x x jo je ie lo lo J HALAW NG IRA op ommo x o e eo C C C C O RRRA DH AE ER A EHE NG RE SIT 11363 2006 EERE AIRERA F X PRAM EE E EE EEP O GALE SIT 11363 2006 fe EEE RER ULRAAWAP DAAA RANAMA A RHAKA TOR K BAAR RTA A RA AA EA NG RM AERA AAC FENET eM SB TH HAE SUIT 11363 2006 HET AHN 7 11 Appendix 268 Copyright 2014 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd All rights reserved This user s guide is provided for information purposes only All information included herein is subject to change without notice Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages arising from or related to use of this user s guide Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows 7 8 and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Microsoft Internet Explorer Excel Word PowerPoint and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Google Picasa Google Cloud Print Google Docs Android and Gmail are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc iPad iPhone iPod touch Mac and Mac OS
92. 8 126 143 customer support 302 D default paper selection printing 292 default settings setting a fax header 135 tray setting 59 deleting address book 147 demo page 357 device options 237 direct printing utility 82 display screen 23 displaying IP address 307 document box understanding the document box screen 181 document feeder 47 driver installation 312 Unix 317 duplex printing Index Index print 76 E easy document creator 118 169 e book conversion 169 editing group address 147 individual address 146 error correction mode 140 error message 208 ethernet 306 external authentication server 164 F favorites settings for printing 73 fax address book 162 clearing stored documents 348 forward 141 prefix dial 140 printing 141 secure receive 141 toll save 140 141 fax receiving changing the receive mode in answering machine fax secure receiving fax sending delay sending resending automatically sending a fax fax email individual address faxing changing receiving mode delaying a fax transmission forwarding preparing to fax receiving receiving a fax in memory receiving in Ans Fax mode receiving in Tel mode sending setting the fax header features print media feature printer driver filtering 137 138 137 139 139 136 136 135 145 137 136 139 123 137 139 137 137 135 135 249 63 164 IPv6 164 MAC 163 164 network 311 firmware 165 front view
93. 85 Redistributing toner 9 Troubleshooting 186 Replacing the toner cartridge A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life e The status LED and the toner related message on the display indicate when the toner cartridge should be replaced e The computer s Samsung Printing Status Program window appears on the computer telling you cartridge is empty on toner see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 173 Check the Product Code on top of the toner cartridge before ordering and installing to your machine see Available consumables on page 234 2 e Shake the toner cartridge thoroughly it will increase the initial print quality e Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 A e To prevent damage to the toner cartridge do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes Cover it with a piece of paper if necessary e Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area e Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package They might scratch the drum of the cartridge e If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 9 Troubleshooting Replacing the toner cartridge Toner cartridge 9 Troubleshooting
94. Add an app to my program list With this feature user can set default settings destinations required for each program Also can set YY default options as Auto Launch add shortcut to Home Search Search for a desired options 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 110 Understanding the Scan 4 Send screen Build Job This option can be turned on or off When this option is on After the scanning is finished the Scan More window appears to ask if you want to scan another page If you select Yes then you can scan another page in the current job If you select No then the scanning process is completed and the remainder of the job is performed Attach File Only Allows you to attach a file to your message You can use this option to quickly send one or more files from the hard disk drive BOX of the machine to an SMB FTP Email Box USB Save as Default Allows you to save the current Scan 8 Send settings as the default Scan amp Send settings After you save the default Scan amp Send settings all future send tasks use these settings Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to save the current settings as the default Scan amp Send settings Restore Default Allows you to restore the Scan amp Send settings to the default Scan amp Send settings of the machine This option changes the current Scan amp Send settings to the original settings configured at the factory Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to restore the
95. Box in Print Send tab Delete You can delete Box and file in Forward Print Send Download tab Edit You can edit Box and file name in Print Send Download tab Browse If you want to browse the Box check the Box you want then click Browse Task You can copy and move the Box and files in Print Send Download tab 8 Management Tools 161 SyncThru Web Service Address book tab You can manage the address book This feature is also available from the machine see Understanding the address screen on page 143 Individual You can manage individual entries in the address book Group You can manage group address books Settings tab Settings tab has sub menus Machine Settings and Network Settings You cannot view or access this tab if you do not log in as an administrator see Logging into SyncThru Web Service on page 160 Machine Settings You can set machine settings System You can set machine related settings Printer You can set print related settings such as darkness or adjust the background This feature is also available from the machine see Print Settings on page 292 Copy You can set copy related settings such as darkness or adjusting the background This feature is also available from the machine see Setting options on page 97 Fax You can set fax related settings such as fax number or redial times This feature is also available from the machine see Understanding the fax screen on
96. C addresses IPv4 Filtering You can enable disable IPv6 filtering as well as manage filtering rules This feature is also available from the machine see Network filtering settings on page 311 IPv6Filtering You can enable disable IPv6 filtering as well as manage filtering rules This feature is also available from the machine see Network filtering settings on page 311 MAC Filtering You can enable disable Mac filtering as well as manage filtering rules This feature is also available from the machine see Network filtering settings on page 311 External Authentication Server Set the servers for authentication 802 1x You can enable 802 1x authentication which is a port based authentication If this authentication is enabled the machine is not allowed to access through the protected side of the network until the machine is authorized Use this feature to protect your network This feature is also available from the machine see 802 1x on page 299 User Access Control You can restrict users from accessing the machine or application You can also give specific permission for user to only use certain feature of the machine For example you can allow user A to only use print feature In this case user A will not be able to scan copy or fax with the machine Authentication Activating access control You can choose the authentication method for user authentication Select a mode and click on the Options button
97. Cs smart phones and printers Refer to the Access Point user guide for password settings Setup method Connecting method Description amp Reference From the computer See Using a network cable on page 323 With Access From the machine s See Using the WPS Settings menu on Point control panel page 321 See Using the Wi Fi Networks on page 323 Wi Fi Direct setup See Setting the Wi Fi Direct for mobile printing on page 325 3 Network Setup 320 Wireless network setup Optional Using the WPS Settings menu If your machine and access point or wireless router support Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS then you can easily configure the wireless network settings Choosing your type There are two methods available to connect your machine to a wireless network The Push Button Configuration PBC method allows you to connect your machine to a wireless network by pressing both the WPS Settings menu on through the WPS Settings menu without the need for a computer the control panel of your machine and the WPS PBC button on a Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS enabled access point or wireless router respectively 2 e Ifyou want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode p y make sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine The Personal Identification Number PIN method helps you connect your Using the WPS PBC button or entering the PIN from the computer to mac
98. Gateway Address are automatically allocated by the DHCP Server DNS Configuration You can configure the DNS server Host Name Enter the host name You can enter up to 63 characters Default name is SEC MAC address Domain Name Enter the domain name You can enter up to 128 characters 3 Network Setup 306 Network settings configuring TCP IP Primary DNS Server Enter the address of the DNS server you want to use primarily Secondary DNS Server Enter the address of the DNS server you want to use as an alternative Dynamic DNS Registration If you want to use check the checkbox es of dynamic DNS registration If this option is checked the machine registers its host name and domain name to configured DNS servers dynamically Also if this option is checked and DHCP is selected DHCP FQDN options are automatically disabled WINS Windows Internet Name Service You can configure the WINS server WINS is used in the Windows operating system Select this option Display IP address You can set the machine to display the IP address on the Notification Bar If you select this option the IP address will show on the Notification Bar TCP IPv6 You can set the IPv6 settings Tap Settings gt Network Settings gt Ethernet gt TCP IPv6 from the home screen or Apps 2 You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address o
99. If you have other original in the DSDF all other original images get printed the same way Off Disables this feature Auto Repeat The number of images is automatically determined by the original image and paper size The number of repeating images is automatically selected based on size of the original the size of output page and the reduce enlarge percentage by up to 100 Manual Repeat Manually select the number of images from 2 4 6 8 9 or 16 Watermark The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document For example you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading Draft or Confidential printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document 7 F Stamp KA You cannot apply stamps to booklets or posters 4 Copying 100 Understanding the copy screen Prints the IP Address ID Device Information Comment Page Number or Date amp Time on printouts You can set the Text Size Opacity or Position of the stamp Ol Overlay An overlay is text and or images stored on a computer hard drive HDD ina special file format that can be printed on any document Overlays can take the place of traditional letterhead paper Rather than using preprinted letterhead you can create an overlay matching the layout of the letterhead To print a letter on your company s letterhead you do not need to load preprinted letterhead in the machine just enable the letterhead overlay
100. NS Configuration You can configure the DNS server TCP IPv6 Host Name Enter the host name You can enter up to 63 characters Default name is SEC MAC address You can set the IPv6 settings Domain Name Enter the domain name You can enter up to 128 Protocol Tap to use IPv6 protocol in the system Reboot the machine to characters apply the change Primary DNS Server Enter the address of the DNS server you want to use IPv6 Address Shows the IPv6 address types rimarily p j Link local Address This is an IPv6 address starting with a prefix value FE80 Secondary DNS Server Enter the address of the DNS server you want to This address has local link scope and is automatically generated use as an alternative E bagon Stateless Address This is an IPv6 address which is formed by router Dynamic DNS Registration If you want to use check the checkbox es of advertised prefix and interface identifier On a interface like Ethernet dynamic DNS registration If this option is checked the machine interface identifier is usually derived from the Mac address of the registers its host name and domain name to configured DNS servers machine The advertised prefix depends on the router configurations dynamically Also if this option is checked and DHCP is selected DHCP FODN options are automatically disabled 2 Moreth dd b fi d forth ter adverti t but WINS You can configure the WINS server WINS is used in the Windows A PETN p
101. No on the display screen Tap the ID Name input box The pop up keyboard appears Enter your name or the company name see Understanding the pop up keyboard on page 38 Tap Done Tap the Fax Number input box Enter your fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel Tap Done 2g Tap Ge or select other settings Sending a fax 1 Place the originals face up in the DSDF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DSDF see Loading originals on page 45 Tap Send from the home screen or Apps 2 3 Adjust the document settings in the Send tab or More tab 4 Tap Bana enter a fax number directly using on the screen then tap or using Favorites Recent Groups Contacts tap from the display screen You can send a fax up to 10 destinations at once You can view and delete a destination from Destination List BB To insert a pause tap while entering the fax number A dash appears on the display when a pause is inserted If you want to use On Hook dial tap and enter a fax number using the numeric keypad on the screen while you hear the dial tone 5 Tap BA to start the process 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 135 Sending a fax L You can send a fax directly from your computer see Using a fax in your computer on page 124 When you want to cancel a fax job tap sor from virtual hard key before the machine starts transmission Or tap Job Status from
102. Recycled see Opening printing preferences on page 66 Toner specks Aa Cc A a C c l KE CG Aa C c Aa CE The paper may not meet specifications for example the paper may be too moist or rough see Print media specifications on page 249 The transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine Contact a service representative The paper path may need cleaning Contact a service representative Check the location of the machine If the area is not well ventilated this problem may occur 9 Troubleshooting 218 i Solving other problems Condition Dropouts Suggested Solutions If faded areas generally rounded occur randomly on the page A single sheet of paper may be defective Try reprinting the job The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface Try a different brand of paper see Print media specifications on page 249 The paper lot is bad The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner Try a different kind or brand of paper Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click Paper tab and set type to thick paper see Opening printing preferences on page 66 If these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative Condition Vertical lines AaBbCe AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCe Suggested Solutions If black vertical streaks appear on the
103. Settings gt Management gt Supplies Life from the main screen 2 Check the consumables life 10 Supplies and Accessories l2a1 Using a USB Drive device This chapter explains how to use a USB Drive device with your machine Understanding the USB screen To use the USB feature tap Box gt USB from the home screen or Apps Documents and images printed and sent from USB can be stored in the Box see Using Box on page 181 About USB Drive device USB Drive devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you more room for storing documents presentations music and videos high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or move You can do the following on your machine using a USB Drive device Scan documents and save them on a USB Drive device Print data stored on a USB Drive device Format the USB Drive device Your machine supports USB Drive devices with FAT16 FAT32 and sector size of 512 bytes Check your USB Drive device s file system from your dealer You must use only an authorized USB Drive device with an A plug type connector a Of O X ima O Use only a USB Drive device with metal shielded connector Only use a USB Drive device that has obtained compatibility certification otherwise the machine might not recognize it Insert a USB Drive device into the USB port on your machine 10 Supplies and Accessories ga Using a USB Drive device Do not i
104. This information is configured by the machine s administrator j Redistributing toner When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life e White streaks or light printing occurs and or density variation side to side e The Status LED blinks red The toner related message saying that the toner is low may appear on the display e The computer s Samsung Printing Status program window appears on the computer telling you which cartridge is low on toner see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 173 If this happens you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge In some cases white streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner KU Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 A e To prevent damage to the toner cartridge do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes Cover it with a piece of paper if necessary e Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area e Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package They might scratch the drum of the cartridge If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 9 Troubleshooting 1
105. This option is the conventional layout used in book binding Short Edge Binding This option is the type often used with calendars From your Mac application select Print from the File menu Select Layout from the drop down list under Orientation Select a binding orientation from the Two Sided option Select the other options to use U A WN Click Print and the machine prints on both sides of the paper If you print more than 2 copies the first copy and the second copy might print on the same sheet of paper Avoid printing on both sides of paper when you are printing more than 1 copy Click the question mark on the bottom left corner of the window and click on the topic you want to know about A pop up window appears with information about that option s feature which is provided from the driver Printer 10 88 181 197 ia fa Presets Standard Copies Gl M Collated Two Sided Pages All OFrom 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 I 20 99 by 29 70em Orientation LG 1G Layout iH Pages per Sheet 1 g Layout Brecon F S Va N Ced lol CET Border None a Two Sided Off a l Reverse Page Orientation HOEY Gino A tow Cara Cam 3 Printing Linux printing Some features may not be available depending on models or options It means that the features are not supported Printing from applications There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX Pri
106. Torn paper Remove all staples and paper clips before loading Make sure any glue ink or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper Do not load booklets pamphlets transparencies or documents with other unusual characteristics Using the document feeder you can load up to 50 sheets of paper 75 g m 20 Ib bond for one job 2 Media and Tray Loading originals 3 Adjust the document width guides to the paper size Dust on the DSDF glass may cause black lines on the printout Always keep the glass clean 2 Media and Tray 48 Selecting print media You can print on a variety of print media such as plain paper envelopes labels and transparencies Always use print media that meet the guidelines for use KA gt Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this user s guide and still not produce satisfactory results This may be the result of the sheets characteristics improper handling unacceptable temperature and humidity levels or other variables over which cannot be controlled with your machine e Before purchasing large quantities of print media ensure that it meets Guidelines for select the print media the requirements specified in this user s guide Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user s guide may cause the following problems A e Using print media that does n
107. User s Guide Samsung Multifunction ProXpress M458 series BASIC This guide provides information concerning installation basic operation and troubleshooting on Windows ADVANCED ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE This administrator s guide provides advanced information for administrator s to use and manage the machine Some features may not be available depending on model or country Printing on special media 55 1 Introduction Setting the paper size and type 59 Selecting an output location 61 Key benefits 6 Features by model 8 Printi Useful to know 13 O 3 Printing About mi Sae guide 14 Printer driver features 63 Safety information 15 Basic printing 64 Machine overview 20 3 map Opening printing preferences 66 Control panel overview 23 5 Using special print features 74 Connecting a network cable 24 GRAN a k Using direct printing utility 82 Turning on ga la Changing the default print settings 84 ceed tnaLEbs ai Setting your machine as a default machine 85 Display SoRen and useful menu 29 Printing to a file PRN 86 Understanding the pop up keyboard 38 Mac printing 87 Installing the driver locally 39 RE j aahadi var 45 Linux printing 89 Reinskalling Unix printing 91 2 Media and Tray 4 Copying Loading originals a3 Understanding the copy screen 94 Selecting print media 49 Basic copying 103 Loading paper in the tray 50 Quick copying 104 BASIC ID card copying 105 Using SyncThru Web Se
108. ace connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet do not attempt to force it in Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet or this could result in electric shock Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power telephone or PC interface cords This could result in electric shock or fire and or injury to your pet Operating method A Caution a Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing It can cause damage to the machine Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper tray You may get injured y Be careful when replacing paper or removing jammed paper New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts A _ When printing large quantities the bottom part of the paper output area may get hot Do not allow children to touch Burns can occur NG 5 i 3 When removing jammed paper do not use tweezers or sharp metal objects It can damage the machine op Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray It can damage the machine 1 Introduction 16 Safety information O Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening This could result in elevated component temperatures which can cause damage or fire O Use of controls or adjustments o
109. ail in the image and a larger file size DRPD Dual Inline Memory Module DIMM a small circuit board that holds memory DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data received fax data DLNA The Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA is a standard that allows devices on a home network to share information with each other across the network DNS Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers Duplex A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print or scan on both sides of the paper A printer equipped with a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle Duty Cycle The Domain Name Server DNS is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks such as the Internet Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact striking an ink soaked cloth ribbon against the paper much like a typewriter Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year The lifespan means the average capacity of print outs usually within the warrant
110. ain the list of available supplies and maintenance parts e See Available consumables on page 234 e See Available accessories on page 235 To order Samsung authorized supplies accessories and maintenance parts contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine You can also visit www samsung com supplies and then select your country region to obtain the contact information for service 10 Supplies and Accessories 233 Available consumables When supplies reach the end of their life spans you can order the followings of supplies for your machine Type Average yield Part name Average continuous cartridge yield Approx 7 000 standard pages e M4583 series MLT D304S Average continuous cartridge yield Approx 20 000 standard pages e M4583 series MLT D304L Toner cartridge Average continuous cartridge yield Approx 40 000 standard pages e M4580 series MLT D303E e M4583 series MLT D304E Approx 100 000 pages e M4580 series MLT R303 Imaging unit F e M4583 series MLT R304 a Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19752 The number of pages may be affected by operating environment printing interval graphics media type and media size b Based on simplex 3 average A4 Letter size pages per job and above mentioned coverage pattern The number of pages may be affected by operating environment printing interval graphics media type and media size 2 Depen
111. al Stand Install Guide provided with the optional Stand Otherwise the machine could fall over if on incline and cause bodily injury Wireless NFC kit This kit lets you use your machine as a Wireless and NFC machine To purchase Wireless NFC kit contact the source where you bought the machine Installing Wireless NFC kit can be performed only by an authorized service provider dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine a Plain paper 75 g m 20 Ib bond SL NWE001X 10 Supplies and Accessories 235 Available maintenance parts You need to replace the maintenance parts at specific intervals to keep the machine in the best condition and avoid print quality and paper feeding problems resulting from the worn out parts Maintenance parts are mostly rollers belts and pads However the replacement period and parts may differ depending on the model Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service provider dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine To purchase maintenance parts contact the retailer where you bought the machine The replacement period for the maintenance parts is informed by the Samsung Printer Status program Or if your machine supports display screen a message is displayed in the display screen The replacement period varies based on the operating system used computing performance application software connecting method paper type paper size and job complexity
112. al options see Setting options on page 112 More 10 52 To Add Destination Me Email Fax SMB FTP Box Original Duplex Scan Options File Name File Format Resolution Quality OCR Language Command keys Description Button Name Quick Menu Open the quick menu i Address book Open your saved address book F Fax Send a fax My Program Add an app to my program list ka Sub menu Open the sub menu Action overflow 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 126 Understanding the fax screen Button Name DE COPNON Button Name Description ome When A tagged in UE dena Uo Reset Reset to app default configuration configured in their My Page profile appears You can set the destination in the Send to Destination menu of the My Page app see On Hook When you press this button you can hear a dial tone Then enter a fax number It is similar to making a call using speaker phone Understanding the My Page menu on page 37 Administrators can also set the default destination in the sub menu Action overflow gt Send Settings gt Me Setting Stop Stop a job at any time A popup window appears to show the jobs that you can stop Start Start a job oe JBE KU You must log in to use your Me destination If you do not log in then the machine sends the copy to the Me destination specified by the Preview administrator Preview displays the origin
113. al scanned image Virtual Hard Key Button Name Description Setting View changed options list Ee Histor y 2 e The positon of virtual hard keys is fixed on the right side of screen 7 Preview for Shows the job preview When an app is launched the virtual hard keys are shown ki ij Pa status If the screen is touched the virtual hard keys always appear O If the f touched the virtual hard keys are hidden and shown 6 Scan amp Send Faxing Understanding the fax screen Button Name Description Selecting the color mode ed for Scans for job Use one of the following options to use for the scan Ko Mono Use black and white 1 bit per pixel O 2 e This button appears to edit when e Gray Use grayscale 8 bit per pixel scanning Adjust the prescanned image with operation functions such as rotate and crop Color Use color 24 bit per pixel each of the RGB channels has 8 bits Selecting the original type S Start Starts a job Use the original type setting to improve copy quality by selecting the appropriate document type for a copy job Text Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images Adjusting the brightness Text Photo Use if the original is a mix of text and images You can adjust the brightness level of a copy if needed for easier reading if the original contains faint markings or dark images Adjust the brightness level using the slider
114. ala aag mag j o ge vere nem a ener only one will be displayed in the display screen operating system Select this option Display IP Address You can set the machine to display the IP address on the Notification Bar If you select this option the IP address will show on the Notification Bar Stateful Address This is an IPv6 address which is acquired by a DHCPv6 server Manual Address This is an IPv6 address which an administrator can configure manually DHCPv6 Configuration Select the DHCPv6 configuration you want to us Use DHCP as directed by a router DHCPv6 is enabled when a router advertises to use DHCPv6 Always Enable DHCP Regardless of router advertisement use DHCP v6 to acquire an IPv6 address 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 298 Network Settings Never use DHCP Disables DHCPv6 DHCP Unique Identifier Show the DHCP Unique Identifier DHCP Identity Association Identifier Show the DHCP Identity Association Identifier 802 1x You can enable 802 1x authentication which is a port based authentication If this authentication is enabled the machine is not allowed to access through the protected side of the network until the machine is authorized Use this feature to protect your network 802 1x Check to enable this feature 802 1x Authentication Method Select the authentication algorithm to use EAP MD35 Offers minimal security The MD5 hash function is vulnerable to dic
115. ally receives the fax If you want to change to another receive mode follow the steps below Receiving manually in Telephone mode You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook and then pressing O Start from virtual hard key when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine The machine begins receiving a fax Receiving automatically in Answering Machine Fax Tap Settings gt Fax Settings gt Receive Mode on the display screen mode Telephone Receive faxes by pressing On Hook and then O Start from To use this mode you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on virtual hard key the back of your machine Fax Receive incoming faxes normally and immediately enter the fax If the caller leaves a message the answering machine records the message as reception mode normal If your machine detects a fax tone on the line it automatically starts to Answering Machine Fax Use when an answering machine is attached to receive the fax your machine Your machine answers the incoming call and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax KA e Receive start code When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones press the keys 9 on the extension phone The machine receives the fax Press the buttons slowly in sequence If you still hear the fax tone from the remo
116. ample Use panning to move icons from your home screens or application menus to other pages Command Keys Back Return to the previous screen option or step EAJ Home Go to the main home screen SS Recent Show recently used apps Quick launch A customizable key See the next section for options 1 Introduction 29 Display screen and useful menu Add quick launch 1 From the display screen tap the Settings G3 icon gt Display gt More Settings gt Quick Launch 2 Select the desired quick launch function None The icon is not shown Screen Capture BB Capture the current screen to an image file Applications Fee Open a screen showing all apps Search Q Open the search screen 3 Tap xD Back to return to the settings menu Home screen overview The main home screen is the starting point for many applications and functions You can customize it with application icons shortcuts and widgets to give you instant access to information and applications You can open the default page at any time by tapping the E icon The screen images in this user guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or model KA Depending on authentication settings a machine s users may need to enter an ID and password If this is enabled the machine can only be used by a user with an authorized ID and password on the machine Contact the machine s administrator Navigating the home screens
117. and multiple files are scanned the machine creates sub folders in the file folder you selected and the sent files are stored in the sub folder If all folder creation options are enabled at the same time sent files are stored as below When a single scanned file is sent folder user name 2014 01 01 DOC jpg When multiple scanned files are sent folder user name 2014 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC000 jpg folder user name 2014 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC001 jpg folder user name 2014 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC002 jpg 20 Select the policy for generating file names in Filing Policy If the server already contains a file of the same name the file is processed based on the following options Change Name The sent file is automatically saved as a pre defined file name Cancel Do not save the sent file Overwrite Overwrite the existing file with the newly sent file 7 Setting up an Address Book 150 Using SyncThru Web Service 21 22 23 24 L Enter the file name in File Name to store on the server To verify that the process is working with your settings click Test Enter FTP server information as you did for SMB Click Apply Click Undo to delete the information you entered If you click Cancel the Add window is closed Editing individual addresses in the address book Check the box for the address you want to edit and click Edit Change the address information Click Apply Click Undo to reverse any changes you entered Clic
118. are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations The software included in this product contains open source software You may obtain the complete corresponding source code for a period of three years after the last shipment of this product by sending an email to mailto oss request samsung com It is also possible to obtain the complete corresponding source code in a physical medium such as a CD ROM a minimal charge will be required The following URL http opensource samsung com opensource Samsung_M458x_Series seq 28 leads to the download page of the source code made available and open source license information as related to this product This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information QR code REV 4 00 11 Appendix 269 User s Guide Samsung Multifunction ProXpress M458x series ADVANCED ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE This administrator s guide provides advanced information for administrator s to use and manage the machine Some features may not be available depending on model or country BASIC This guide provides information concerning installation basic operation and troubleshooting on Windows ADVANCED ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 1 About this Administrator s Guide Convention 274 Intended audience 275 Security policies for admin
119. as almost reached its estimated cartridge life Replace the toner cartridge for the best print quality when this message appears Using a cartridge beyond this stage can result in printing quality issues see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 187 If the machine stops printing replace the toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 187 Message Scanner locked or another problem occurred Meaning The CCD Charged Couple Device lock has been locked Suggested solutions Unlock the CCD lock Or turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Sensor Failure error number Turn off then on Call for service if the problem persists There is a problem in the sensor system Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Shake toner cartridge and then install Replace toner cartridge if the problem persists Small amount of toner is left in the indicated cartridge You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner see Redistributing toner on page 185 Replace with new imaging unit The indicated imaging unit has almost reached its estimated imaging unit life Replace the imaging unit for the best print quality when this message appears Using a imaging unit beyond this stage can result in printing quality issues see Replacing the
120. aser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition Warning Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from laser scanner assembly The reflected beam although invisible can damage your eyes When using this product these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons LALA LES MSL LGA PAN as DIREK E CPT THE BEAN CITAHRES PLASSE Mik ACHTER LARD EST RL AG WENA TESE STP AHL SPAS Fl EEA AP TERT CLASS HA HELD BUM LAGE MLE EM CAB COLSTRIP ENTEN LES KH AL PASCAL TTERDYWE CLASES 38 AAD LABSA ey Ee Oe L PORTAAN LAENG PATE ARDHE i Pakain PREGAUCION PADS LASA EL GG LAST NG PRAT AL ABBIE PATI LP AL HA 2 MAEL PEREHI CLA mi ich LAN ni AD ABA CAAA KLASSE BO OCS LAS TRAK HOY DEP YELO BLOTS Es ae STEAM MIVAFEEL FA LAMP Le a A UNDG USAT TELSE POP STRALIMG a LAL mal KA DONE NG PIETA CG NE EG T e M MOTE LA 3H Etir ATT ALTEST JET H m CLASS 36 PRA oe FoR ee Sees DU li 8 ae a ea eo LG Ba NGA i HAT SOAS HE PRA AR irae ERE EAT ARE CT Ey EHRT EHEER RRINE SAR 11 Appendix Regulatory information Ozone safety This product s ozone emission rate is under 0 1 ppm Because ozone is heavier than air keep the product in a place with good
121. assword in Password and re enter the same password in Click Address Book Confirm Password 1 7 Enter a domain name in Domain O N AO Uf UW Click Add 7 Setting up an Address Book 149 Using SyncThru Web Service L 18 19 If the SMB server you entered is not registered to a domain leave this field blank or enter the computer name of the SMB server Enter the scan file folder to store scanned images in Path Example shared Folder Select Scan folder creating policy options Create new folder using login name If you select this option the machine creates a sub folder in the file folder you selected The sub folder is named using the user name from step 15 If the file folder already has a sub folder of the same name the machine does not create a sub folder Create new folder every You can set the cycle of sub folder creation The machine create a sub folder according to these options If the file folder already has a sub folder of the same name the machine does not create a sub folder Day A sub folder is created every day using the name format YYYY MM DD for example 2014 01 01 Month A sub folder is created every month using the name format YYYY MM for example 2014 01 Year A sub folder is created every year using the name format YYYY for example 2014 Create new folder only if scan output consist of several files If you select this option
122. atermark Message box You can enter up 4 Click Update to save the changes to 256 characters lick OK or Pri il it the Pri i When the First Page Only box is checked the watermark prints on the 5 Pen Oe ELAM or a first page only 4 Select watermark options Deleting a watermark You can select the font name style size and shade from the Font Attributes section as well as set the angle of the watermark from the 1 Watermark Alignment and Angle section To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 66 2 Click the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down 5 Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermarks list list 6 When you finish editing click OK or Print until you exit the Print 3 Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks window list and click Delete To stop printing the watermark select None from the Watermark drop down list 4 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Editing a watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 66 2 Click the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list 3 Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options 3 Printing Using special print featu
123. aving the DSDF open while copying may affect copy quality and toner consumption e Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout Always keep it clean e Ifyou are copying a page from a book or magazine lift the DSDF until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm 1 inch start copying with the lid open A e Be careful not to break the scanner glass You may get hurt e Do not put hands on the scanner glass while closing the DSDF The DSDF may fall on your hands and cause injury e Do not look at the light inside of the scanner while copying or scanning It is harmful to eyes 3 Close the DSDF 2 Media and Tray 46 Loading originals 1 Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before In the dual scan document feeder DSDF loading originals Preparing originals Do not load paper smaller than 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 8 inches or larger than 216 x 356 5 x 14 inches ai i PVRS Ie ees 2 Load the originals face up into the DSDF Make sure that the bottom of Do not attempt to load the following types of paper in order to prevent the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input paper jam low print quality and machine damage tray Carbon paper or carbon backed paper Coated paper Onion skin or thin paper lt Wrinkled or creased paper Curled or rolled paper
124. ay screen 4 the Anonymous from Login Type If the SMB server you entered is not registered to any domain leave it 2 Tap the Name input box and then enter the name of the recipient blank or enter the computer name of the SMB server e User Login Name Select this option to create a sub folder in the file folder you selected The sub folder is named according to the user name 2 Tab kug favorite icon for addresses you use often and want to find easily entered in step 5 If the file folder already has a sub folder of the same name the machine does not create a sub folder Na o Folder Creation Cycle Set the cycle of sub folder creation The machine 3 Tap the Email input boxes to enter that information of the recipient creates sub folders according to this option If the file folder already has a sub folder of the same name the machine does not create a sub folder 4 Speed No is automatically assigned with the first number of unused Every Day A sub folder is created every day using the name format numbers YYYY MM DD for example 2014 01 01 2 Use the Speed No on the numeric keypad to select an address quickly 5 Tap the Fax input box and enter the fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel You can enter only numbers area code first if necessary K Inserting a pause On some telephone systems you must dial an access code like 9 and listen for a second dial tone before dialing the number In
125. ayout and Skip Blank Pages you want to use in eco mode As long as you do not change the options from the other tabs the document will be printed out as set in the eco mode Passcode If the administrator sets On Forced in Default Eco Mode for this machine the eco mode is always set by this machine s eco setting while the Eco Options in the printer driver are disabled If you need to change the print settings click Passcode and enter the password or contact your administrator Result Simulator Result Simulator shows the result of reduced emission of carbon dioxide used electricity and the amount of saved paper in accordance with the settings you selected The results are calculated on the basis that the total number of printed 4 paper is one hundred without a blank page when the eco mode is disabled e Referred to the calculation coefficient about CO2 energy and paper from IEA International Energy Agency the index of Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communication of Japan and www remanufacturing org uk Each model has a different index e The power consumption in printing mode refers to the average printing power consumption in this machine e The actual saved or reduced amount may differ depending on the operating system used computing performance application software connection method media type media size job complexity etc 3 Printing Opening printing preferences Spool This option can
126. back into the machine that the paper is below the maximum paper capacity guide inside thetray PAN pap pariy 9 When you print a document set the paper type and size for the tray See Setting the paper size and type on page 59 A it you experience problems with paper feeding check whether the paper meets the media specification see Print media specifications on page 249 and then try placing one sheet at a time in the multi purpose tray see Printing on special media on page 55 Multi purpose tray The multi purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material such as postcards note cards and envelopes Paper quantity indicator shows the amount of paper in the tray Tips on using the multi purpose tray Load only one type size and weight of print media at a time in the multi purpose tray To prevent paper jams do not add paper while printing when there is still paper in the multi purpose tray This also applies to other types of print 1 Full media 2 Empty Print media should be loaded face up with the top edge going into the multi purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray 2 Media and Tray 152 Loading paper in the tray Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and print 3 Load the paper quality problems see Print media specifications on page 249 Flatten any curl on postcards envelopes and labels before loading them into the multi pur
127. be dialed before the destination number Users may use this to access a PABX e g 9 or an area code e g 02 Once this number is set it automatically appears on the screen when entering a phone fax number Option Receive Mode Description Select the fax receiving mode e Telephone Press On Hook Dial and then Start to receive a fax e Fax Receive incoming faxes normally and immediately enter the fax reception mode e Answering Machine Fax Use when an answering machine is attached to your machine Your machine answers the incoming call and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax Ring to Answer Set the number of times the machine rings before answering an incoming call ECM Mode Set the machine to correct errors This helps overcome poor line quality and ensures any faxes you send are properly transmitted to any other error correction equipped fax machine Sending a fax in this mode may take more time Modem Speed Set the modem speed 4 8Kbps 33 6Kbps Toll Save Set the machine to send faxes in the toll save time to reduce phone bill costs DRPD Mode Enable a user to answer several different phone numbers on the same telephone line Set the machine to recognize different ring patterns for each number This setting may not be available in your coun
128. cally installed from the Windows Update Silent installation Mode Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not require any user intervention Once you start the installation the machine driver and software are automatically installed on your computer You can start the silent installation by typing s or S in the command window Command line Parameters Following table shows commands that can be used in the command window 3 Network Setup 313 Installing driver over the network Following command line are effective and operated when command is used with s or S But h H or are exceptional commands that can be operated solely Command line s or S Definition Starts silent installation Description Installs machine drivers without prompting any Uls or user intervention Command line p sport name gt or P lt port name Definition Specifies printer port Network Port will be created by use of Standard TCP IP Port monitor For local port this port must exist on system before being specified by command Description Printer port name can be specified as IP address hostname USB local port name IEEE1284 port name or network path For example P XXX XXX XXX XXX N where XXX XXX XXX XXX means IP address for network printer p USB001 P LPT1 p hostname p Ncomputer nametshar ed printer
129. can copy wireless setting from your phone to your printer by touching your mobile device on the NFC tag on your printer Check that NFC and Wi Fi Direct enabled features are on your mobile device and Wi Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer Open Samsung Mobile Print Manager from your mobile device If you do not have Samsung Mobile Print Manager installed on your cellphone go to the application store Samsung Apps Play Store on your mobile device and just search for download the app and try again Mobile device Samsung Mobile Print Pro screen appears Press Wi Fi Setup Type in the ID and Password Use the same admin ID Password as when logging in from the machine see Log in on page 280 If you want to create a new user or change the password see Security tab on page 163 If the access point or wireless router is connected to the connection confirmation window appears then click OK If the access point or wireless router not connection select the desired access point or wireless router and click OK then click OK 3 Network Setup 333 Using the NFC feature Optional Tag your mobile device usually located on the back of the mobile device over the NFC tag nec on your printer Using the Samsung Mobile Print App Wait few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer Samsung Mobile Print is a free application that enables users to print scan Only users with multi functional printers
130. ce authentication Device authentication requests a user to login before being able to use the device Users cannot use any application without logging in Application Authentication Activate application authentication An administrator can choose the application s to require user to login to use Users cannot use the selected application s without logging in Press Application Mode to enable authentication Method Local Authentication Executes authentication process based on the user information stored at HDD in the device LUI Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For LUI by default SWS Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For SWS by default Auto Logout You can use auto logout Login Restriction You can set the Login Restriction time attempts or lock out time Logout Policy You can set the logout policy SMB and Local Authentication Executes authentication process based on the user information stored at SMB server LUI Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For LUI by default SWS Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For SWS by default Auto Logout You can use auto logout Kerberos and Local Authentication Executes authentication process based on the user information stored at kerberos server LUI Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For LUI by default SWS Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For SWS by default Auto Logout You can use auto logout LDAP and Local Authentication E
131. celing a print job If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler cancel the job as follows You can access this window by simply double clicking the machine icon in the Windows task bar You can cancel the print job with the Cancel Print from the computers Samsung Printer Status program window see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 173 3 Printing 65 Opening printing preferences A W N KA When you select an option in Printing Preferences you may see a warning mark or a An exclamation mark a means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended and mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine s setting or environment Open the document you want to print Select Print from the File menu Select your printer driver from the Select Printer list Click Properties or Preferences L The screenshot may differ depending on model ii T HP _ Printing Preferences exe Favorites Basic Paper Graphics Advanced Eco Samsung Preview 4 Details 2y m3 Last Used Setting Letter mm 8 50 x 11 00 inches inch Normal Printing o 1 Eco Preview Printing 3 Double Sided Printing a Afp 2 in 1 Printing W E Booklet Printing Secure Printing b Optons Xx Cancel e You can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing see Easy Eco Driver on page 168 e You can check the machine s
132. ck menu EY Search Search for a desired menu or app GH View Mode Select the view type My Program Show my program list 8 Management Tools 181 Using Box Button Name Description Storage Sub menu Open the sub menu Action overflow 7 select All Select all folders and files Button Name Description Print Options Set options for printing Forward Manage the forward data e Create folder Create a folder Rename Rename a folder or a file WA To use this feature you may need to log in as an administrator see Log in on page pm Copy Copy folders and files 280 e Move Move folders or files to other storage e Delete Delete folders and files e Clear Browsing Info Clear browsing Print Manage the stored print data information e Detail View the detail information about a folder or a file Send Manage the stored send data e Filing Policy Select a filing policy Format Formatting files or data Download Manage the stored download data grg USB Use a USB Drive device 8 Management Tools 182 Using Box Job progress Creating a private folder This menu appears whenever the machine is processing a job Detail Tap this button to see the status folder path and time of the job Preview Area Allows you to see a preview of the document being saved The image in the Preview area indicates the current send settings such as the orientati
133. com vn support ZAMBIA 0211 350370 www samsung com support Contact SAMSUNG worldwide gg Glossary The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user s guide 802 11 802 11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network WLAN communication developed by the IEEE LAN MAN Standards Committee IEEE 802 802 11b g n 802 11b g n can share same hardware and use the 2 4 GHz band 802 11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps 802 11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps 802 11b g n devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave ovens cordless telephones and Bluetooth devices Access point Access Point or Wireless Access Point AP or WAP is a device that connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks WLAN and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals ADF An Automatic Document Feeder ADF is a scanning unit that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple Inc for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking BIT Depth A computer graphics term describing the number of bits
134. cts list You must log into your Google account to access your Google Address Book UI Configuration Allows you to select the options that appear in the Scan amp Send menu Tap the or symbol on the menu icons to add or remove menus You can also tap and hold a menu icon to move it to a different position or tap Clear All to remove all the menus 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 129 Understanding the fax screen Job progress e Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine This menu appears whenever the machine is processing a job e Click the Help from the home screen or quick menu and Detail Tap this button to see the status destination sender and time of the then click on any option you want to know about job Preview Area Allows you to see a preview of the document being sent The image in the preview area indicates the current send settings such as the Add Destination orientation and size of the file Tap to add a recipient s email address or a fax number If you want to send Send Feedback Allows you to send feedback about the current send job to SMB FTP Box PC or USB click on respective buttons If you want to receive sending job by email you can set from My page app see Understanding the My Page menu on page 37 Original To use this feature you may need to log in as an administrator see Log in This setting is used to impr
135. cure network channel with SSL e The administrator should save the system log files exported by the Exporting feature in a safe place and protected e The administrator should protect the machine from any unauthorized contact with external interfaces 1 About this Administrator s Guide Terminology used in this guide The following terms are used throughout this guide in examples instructions fi Acronyms Meaning and descriptions EAP MS Extensible Authentication Protocol Microsoft Challenge CHAPv2 Handshake Authentication Protocol version 2 IP Internet Protocol Synonym HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably as below P PEAPvO EAP Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol version 0 MS CHAPv2 Extensible Authentication Protocol Microsoft Challenge Terms Synonym Handshake Authentication Protocol version 2 Document original SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Paper media print media MFP Multi Functional Peripheral Multi Functional Printer Machine printer MFP device S N Serial Number User s Guide manual guide SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol TLS Transport Layer Security Acronyms UPnP Universal Plug and Play MDNS Multicast Domain Name System The following acronyms are used throughout this g
136. d The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling creasing or jams and may even damage the fuser For the best print quality position margins no closer than 15 mm 0 6 inches from the edges of the envelope Weight The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g m Avoid printing over the area where the envelope s seams meet 16 Ib otherwise a jam may occur When selecting envelopes consider the following factors Construction Prior to printing envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm 0 25 inches curl and should not contain air Condition Envelopes should not be wrinkled nicked or damaged Temperature Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during operation Use only well constructed envelopes with sharp and well creased folds 2 Media and Tray Ea Printing on special media Load the paper with the side to be printed on facing down To avoid damaging the machine use only labels designed for use in laser machines CB ALS When selecting labels consider the following factors Adhesives The adhesive material should be stable at your machine s fusing temperature about 170 C 338 F for 0 1 second Arrangement Only use labels with no exposed backing between them Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels causing serious jams Curl Prior to printing labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm 0 5 inch
137. d on your computer hard disk drive The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay Do not create an overlay with a watermark 3 Printing EJ Using special print features Using a page overlay After an overlay has been created it is ready to be printed with your document To print an overlay with a document 1 2 Create or open the document you want to print To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 66 Click the Advanced tab Select the Print Overlay from the Overlay drop down list If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Overlay File 1 or Overlay File 2 drop down list select Load from the Overlay List Select the overlay file you want to use If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source you can also load the file when you access the Load window After you select the file click Open The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing Select the overlay from the Overlay List box If necessary check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box If this box is checked a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your document If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected the overlay automatically prints with your document 7
138. d or receive a fax you must connect the supplied cord to the wall jack Refer to Quick installation guide The method of connecting a telephone line varies by country 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 123 Using a fax in your computer You can send a fax directly from your computer Make sure that your machine and the computer are connected to the same network Sending a fax Windows To send a fax from your computer the Samsung Network PC Fax program must be installed You can install the Samsung Network PC Fax driver from the software CD You can select the Samsung Network PC Fax driver in the Select Software window 1 Open the document you want to send Select Print from the File menu N The Print window will be displayed It may look slightly different depending on your application Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window Click Print or OK Enter the recipient s fax number and set any options if necessary For more information about Samsung Network PC Fax click Help o dg wu bw Click Send Checking a sent fax list Windows You can check a sent fax list on your computer From the Start menu click Programs or All Programs 5 Samsung Printers 5 Network PC Fax gt Fax Transmission History Then the Fax Journal appears with the fax list you have sent WA For more information about Fax Transmission History click Help Sending a fax Mac To send a fax from your computer the Fax Uti
139. d try again Press the icon on the Samsung Mobile Print Pro screen Select On from the Phone login set as default menu Mobile device ID appears on the Samsung Mobile Print Pro screen Press Registration Type in the ID Password Domain and Passcode then click OK Use the same admin ID Password Domain as when logging in from the machine see Log in on page 280 2 If you want to create a new user or change the password see Security tab on page 163 Passcode is for when the administrator chooses Two Factor Authentication method You need to enter a passcode for authentication Password and passcode should be different You can select Two Factor Authentication from the SyncThru Web Service select Security gt User Access Control gt Authentication gt Authentication Method gt Options button gt Login Method gt Two Factor Authentication Tag your mobile device usually located on the back of the mobile device over the NFC tag nec on your printer Wait few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer 3 Network Setup 330 Using the NFC feature Optional 2 For some mobile devices NFC tag might not be located at the back of the 2 If you do not have Samsung Mobile Print Manager installed on your mobile device Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile cellphone go to the application store Samsung Apps Play Store on your device before tagging mobile device and ju
140. ded to use the option are not installed You can set the volume for button sound notice alarm and the sounds occurring during a fax job Using the slide bar select the desired volume and press the Test button to test the volume e Key Sound Allows you to adjust the sound volume for when pressing the button Alarm Sound Allows you to adjust the sound volume for when notice alarm Fax Sound Allows you to adjust the sound volume occurring during a fax job This option has other sub options Feedback Haptic Feedback Vibrate when soft keys are press and on certain UI interaction Vibration Intensity Set your touch feedback vibration intensity Display you can change various settings for the display Brightness Allows you to adjust the LCD brightness e Quick Launch You can select the register at Quick Launch Screen capture Applications Search You can management the all application storage and shows all storage informations KU If the machine s power is cut off you need to reset the correct time and date once the power has been restored 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 283 Machine Auto Tone Adjustment Performs a normal or full tone adjustment You can choose the altitude of the place where your machine is located You can W Normal Automatically adjusts the color tone This process takes also adjustment the image management and checking the machine test y moretime than Qu
141. default Scan amp Send settings Send Settings Allows you to quickly scan a document and send it to a destination The scanned document is sent as an image file Tap this option in the sub menu action overflow menu to scan and attach a file to the current message Filing Policy The Filing Policy setting specifies how the machine handles name conflicts when saving files Print Confirmation Report You can use this feature to get confirmation on executed Scan amp Send destination s successfully or not 2 Ifthe report contains characters or fonts that the machine does not support then Unknown may appear in the report instead of the characters fonts Me Setting Allows you to select the default destination for the send job When logged in you can select your any Send destination as the default send destination Same will appear in Scan amp Send widgets too Send to PC Scans and sends scanned output to a computer Address Book Settings This address book contains contacts that are available to all users You can use the address book to make contacts available to anyone who uses the machine Google Address Book This address book contains the contacts registered in your Google contacts list You must log into your Google account to access your Google Address Book UI Configuration Allows you to select the options that appear in the Scan amp Send menu Tap the or symbol on the menu icons to add or remove
142. dering supplies and accessories on page 233 How to replace the toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 187 Replacing the imaging unit When the imaging unit is totally empty The status LED turns red on and the display screen shows the error message of replacing imaging unit Check the type of the imaging unit for your machine Ordering supplies and accessories on page 233 At this stage the imaging unit needs to be replaced Be sure to prepare a new imaging unit in advance see Ordering supplies and accessories on page 233 How to replace the imaging unit see Replacing the imaging unit on page 189 Redistributing toner When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life White streaks or light printing occurs Toner low related message appears on the display The Status LED blinks red If this happens you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge In some cases white streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner How to redistribute the toner see Redistributing toner on page 185 4 Maintenance go Finding the serial number You might need to know the serial number of your machine when calling for a service To check the serial number of your machine follow the steps below KA The serial number is written on the beginning of all the machine reports 1 Tap Settings gt Management gt R
143. dia specifications on page 249 the printing looks on the paper 2 Media and Tray ao Loading paper in the tray i Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs into the standard tray The standard tray can hold a maximum of 550 sheets of plain paper 75 g m2 20 Ib bond Squeeze the paper width guide and pull it to the end of the tray You can purchase an optional tray see Available accessories on page 235 A Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems that require repairs Such repairs are not covered by the warranty or service agreements na 1 Paper width guide J Pull out the tray 3 Squeeze the paper length guide and pull it to the end of the tray 1 Paper length guide 2 Media and Tray EJ Loading paper in the tray After inserting paper into the tray squeeze the paper width guides and Flex and fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before slide them to the desired paper size marked at the bottom of the tray loading papers 5 Load the paper Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp e If you do not adjust the paper width guide it may cause paper jams Do not use a paper with a leading edge curl it may cause a paper jam or the paper can be wrinkled O x x 2 Media and Tray El Loading paper in the tray Do not overload the tray Otherwise it may cause paper jams Make sure 7 Insert the tray
144. ding display messages Messages appear on the display screen to indicate the machine s status or errors Some error messages are shown with graphics to help you troubleshoot problem Refer to the tables below to understand the messages and their meaning and correct the problem if necessary Messages and their explanations are listed in alphabetical order e When you call for service provide the service representative with the contents of display message Ifa message is not in the table reboot the power and try the printing job again If the problem persists call for service e Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options or models tray number indicates the tray number media type indicates the media type media size indicates the paper size error number indicates the error number Message Meaning Suggested solutions The machine cannot detect a toner cartridge Or the seal tape was not removed from the toner cartridge Did not supply enough toner Remove seal tape of toner cartridge or shake it Call for service if the problem persists Remove the sealing tape from the toner cartridge Refer to Quick Install Guide Message End of life Replace with new imaging unit Meaning The indicated imaging unit has reached its estimated imaging unit life Suggested solutions Replace the imaging unit with a Samsung genuine imaging unit see Replacing the ima
145. ding on the options percentage of image area and job mode used the toner cartridge s lifespan may differ When purchasing new toner cartridges or other supplies these must be purchased in the same country as the machine you are using Otherwise new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine due to different configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the specific country conditions A Samsung does not recommend using non genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured toner Samsung cannot guarantee non genuine Samsung toner cartridge s quality Service or repair required as a result of using non genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine s warranty 10 Supplies and Accessories 234 Available accessories You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine s performance and capacity Accessory Memory module Function Extends your machine s memory capacity 9 Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country see Features by model on page 8 Part name SL MEM001 2 GB Optional tray If you are experiencing frequent paper supply problems you can attach an additional 5502 SL SCF4500 sheet tray You can easily move the machine using the stand with its wheels SL DSK001S Stand When using the optional Stand you must install the foot as shown in the Option
146. documents Job Accounting This option allows you to print with the given permission Confidential Printing This option is used for printing confidential documents You need to enter a password to print using it 8 Management Tools Using Samsung Printer Experience Using the sharing feature Scanning from Samsung Printer Experience Samsung Printer Experience allows you to print from other applications The most frequently used printing menus are displayed for quick scanning installed on the computer using the sharing feature 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder 2 This feature is only available for printing jpeg bmp tiff gif and png file formats 2 Click the Samsung Printer Experience tile on the Start screen Click Scan X8 Select the content you want to print from other application 3 4 Set up the scanning parameters such as image type document size and From the Charms select Share gt Samsung Printer Experience resolution Select the printer settings such as the number of copies and orientation Click Prescan cal to check the image A W N VI Siek thE Print Butanto stare print Job 6 Adjust the prescanned image with scanning operation functions such as rotate and mirror Scanning from Windows 8 7 Click Scan Eana save the image EET f 7 K e When you place the originals in the DSDF Prescan kab is not
147. documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax AnyWeb Print helps you screen capture preview scrap and print the screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily than when you use the ordinary program Smart Update allows you to check for the latest software and install the latest version during the printer driver installation process This is available only for Windows If you have Internet access you can get help support application machine drivers manuals and order information from the Samsung website www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads Key benefits Wide range of functionality and application support Supports various paper sizes Print watermark You can customize your documents with words such as Confidential You can print in various operating systems Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and or a network interface Support XOA applications XOd extensible Deen Archie ciune The machine supports XOA custom applications e Regarding the XOA custom applications please contact your XOA custom application provider Features by model Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country Operating System Operating System M458x series Windows e Mac Linux Unix Included Blank Not available Software You can install the printer driver and software when you insert
148. dress from the DHCPV6 server The server looks up the DUID in its database and delivers the appropriate configuration data address lease times DNS servers etc to the client DHCPv6 Identity Association Identifier Each interface has an ID called an Identity Association Identifier IAID that binds the interface to one or more IP addresses Each allocation in the DHCPv6 server includes a DUID and an IAID pair You can enable 802 1x authentication which is a port based authentication If this authentication is enabled the machine is not allowed to access through the protected side of the network until the machine is authorized Use this feature to protect your network 802 1x Check to enable this feature 802 1x Authentication Method Select the authentication algorithm to use EAP MD5 Offers minimal security The MD5 hash function is vulnerable to dictionary attacks and does not support key generation PEAP Recommended for users who only intend to use Microsoft desktop clients and servers For other users it is not recommended EAP MS CHAPv2 MS CHAPv2 provides two way authentication between peers by combining a peer Challenge message with the Response packet and an authenticator Response message on the Success packet TLS This is used to provide secure communication over the Internet between a client and server 3 Network Setup 308 Print settings Ports to set for network printing You can set the ports to use
149. driver is recommended for best print image quality from PostScript based applications such as Acrobat Reader Adobe Illustrator Adobe Photoshop etc ey Download the software from the Samsung website and install it http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads Before installing check whether your computer s OS support the software c XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows Vista OS or higher Supported Blank Not supported 3 Printing 63 Basic printing Mac printing see Mac printing on page 87 Linux printing see Linux printing on page 89 UNIX printing see Unix printing on page 91 The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows 7 Your Printing Preferences window may differ depending on your operating system or the application you are using 1 Open the document you want to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select your machine from the Select Printer list The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range are selected within the Print window L To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver click Properties or Preferences in the application s Print window to change the print setting see Opening printing preferences on page 66 4 To start the print job click OK or Print in the Print window 3 Printing 64 Basic printing Can
150. dware gt Devices and Printers Select your machine Right click your machine and select Set as Default Printer For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 if Set as default printer has a gt you can select other printer drivers connected to the selected printer 3 Printing 85 Printing to a file PRN You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file To create a file 1 Check the Print to file box at the Print window m Pine General select Printer Ratus Ready J Prrd to ti Preferences Locaton Commert Fing Porter Page Range oA Number of copies 1 1 22 33 2 Click Print 3 Type in the destination path and the file name and then click OK For example c 1TempMile name If you type in only the file name the file is automatically saved in My Documents Documents and Settings or Users The saved folder may differ depending on your operating system or the application you are using 3 Printing 86 Mac printing Some features may not be available depending on models or options It Changing printer settings means that the features are not supported You can use advanced printing features when using your machine Open an application and select Print from the File menu The machine name Printing NG eee whic appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on me machine in use Except for the name the composition of the printer properties window is similar t
151. e toll free WebSite www samsung com gr support CZECH 800 SAMSUNG 800 726786 www samsung com cz support DENMARK 70 70 19 70 www samsung com dk support DOMINICA 1 800 751 2676 www samsung com latin support Spanish www samsung com latin_en support English DRC 499999 www samsung com support ECUADOR 1 800 10 72670 1 800 SAMSUNG 72 6786 www samsung com latin support Spanish www samsung com latin_en support English CANADA www samsung com ca_fr support French GENE 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com HHP 02 24828200 cl support CHINA 400 810 5858 www samsung com cn support Bogota 600 12 72Gratis desde www samsung com cualquier parte del pais 01 8000 co support LOMBIA OES 112 112 6 desde su celular SAM 726 0 800 507 7267 www samsung com 00 800 1 SAMSUNG 726 7864 latin support Spanish COSTA RICA www samsung com latin_en support English CROATIA 072 726 786 www samsung com hr support 8000 0077 www samsung com Cote D Ivoire africa_fr support EGYPT 08000 726786 16580 www samsung com eg support Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 359 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center 0818 717100 WebSite Country Region Customer Care Center 0800 10077 WebSite www samsung com EIRE paa a a ie support 800 6225 www samsun
152. e format US AAAEO TXXXX If requested this number must be provided to the telephone company FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate this equipment In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company should notify the customer that service may be stopped However where prior notice is impractical the company may temporarily cease service providing that they a promptly notify the customer b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68 You should also know that e Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system e Ifyou intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine you may experience transmission and reception problems with all the equipment It is recommended that no other equipment except for a regular telephone share the line with your machine 11 Appendix 263 Regulatory information If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the telephone lines Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telep
153. e risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful the option to use a wireless device may be restricted or eliminated Airports Hospitals and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device gt PP gt Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices Since your system is equipped with a wireless device when traveling between countries with your system check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of a wireless device in the destination country If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are in place and the system is fully assembled Wireless devices are not user serviceable Do not modify them in any way Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it Contact manufacturer for service Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit or contact manufacturer Technical Support for additional information 11 Appendix Regulatory information China only ee Ol 7 ste f
154. e software versions of the systems installed Accessbility About System Allows you to configure the machine to make it easier to use In this menu you can change various sound interaction and display options so that the machine is more accessible to users When you set the time and date it will be used for sending printing delayed fax print jobs or will be printed on reports However if they are not correct you need to change it to the correct time You can see the hardware configuration system capabilities and software version of the machine 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 301 System This feature allows you to view the service center s information and contact point where users can get help If you log in as an administrator you can change the contact information System Administrator Check the contact information of the administrator Samsung Support Check the information of the service center 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 302 3 Network Setup This chapter gives you step by step instructions for setting up the network environment before using the machine You need to be familiar with the terms used for setting up the network environment Refer to the glossary for terms you do not understand Glossary on page 366 Network environment Accessing network setup Network settings configuring TCP IP Print settings Ports to set for network printing Set protocols Network filterin
155. eck the addresses you want to delete and press Delete in Group Address Book 7 Setting up an Address Book 156 8 Management Tools This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine Accessing management tools SyncThru Web Service Easy Capture Manager Samsung AnyWeb Print Easy Eco Driver Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Using Samsung Printer Status Using Samsung Printer Experience Using Box Accessing management tools Samsung provides a variety of management tools for Samsung printers 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs N e For Windows 8 from the Charms select Search gt Apps Find Samsung Printers w Under Samsung Printers you can see installed management tools BE Click the management tool you want to use Ul e After installing the driver for some management tools you can access them directly from the Start menu gt Programs or All Programs e For Windows 8 after installing the driver for some management tools you can access them directly from the Start screen by clicking on the corresponding tile 8 Management Tools 158 SyncThru Web Service This chapter gives you step by step instructions for setting up the network environment through SyncThru Web Service Required web browser I
156. ed in your printer system which is intended for home or office use This section is only applicable if these devices are present Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for C use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark is on the system label The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European Commission through the R amp TTE directive European states qualified under wireless approvals EU countries European states with restrictions on use EU EEA EFTA countries No limitations at this time Regulatory compliance statements Wireless guidance Low power Radio LAN devices radio frequency RF wireless communication devices operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz Band may be present embedded in your printer system The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device Additional limitations cautions and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections or country group sections The wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label If the country you will be using the wireless device in is not listed contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements Wirele
157. ed some image loss may occur Tray Confirmation Message When you load paper into a tray you can set the confirmation message to appear automatically This machine can detect some paper sizes and types automatically If you want to set the paper size and type or the machine cannot detect them you can set the size and type directly in the confirmation window e Tray Protection If you set tray 1 to On for example then tray 1 is excluded during tray switching 2 This setting works for copy or print jobs It doesn t affect fax jobs e Tray Priority Settings You can set the tray priority If first setting is tray 1 the machine automatically prints from tray 1 after the second setting tray runs out of paper 2 Media and Tray 60 Selecting an output location The surface of the center tray may become hot if you print a large number of pages at once Make sure that you do not touch the surface and do not allow children near it The machine sends output to the output tray by default The printed pages stack on the output support and the output support will help the printed pages to align Open the output support If paper coming out of the output try has problems such as excessive curl try printing to the rear cover The rear cover can only hold one piece of paper at a time do not let the papers stack on the rear cover 2 Media and Tray CI 3 Printing This chapter explains common printing tasks Printer dr
158. ee Log in on page 280 3 Network Setup 305 Network settings configuring TCP IP When you connect your machine to a network you must first configure the TCP IP settings for the machine The settings shown below are the basic settings required for using your machine as a network machine You can set TCP IP DNS server TCP IPv6 Ethernet and IP address allocation methods You can set ethernet settings Tap Settings gt Network Settings gt Ethernet from the home screen or Apps WU You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine see Settings tab on page 162 Ethernet Port You can enable disable ethernet port Ethernet Speed Choose the speed rate of ethernet MAC Address Shows the Mac address of the machine TCP IP Protocol You can set IPv4 settings Tap Settings 5 Network Settings 5 Ethernet 5 TCP IPv4 from the home screen or Apps You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the ae Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine see Settings tab on page 162 IP Setting You can choose the method for allocating IP addresses Static Select to enter IP address Subnet Mask Gateway Address manually BOOTP IP address Subnet Mask Gateway Address are automatically allocated by the BOOTP Server DHCP IP address Subnet Mask
159. ee Print media specifications on page 249 Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack Ensure that the paper is loaded properly Check the paper type and quality Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl see Print media specifications on page 249 Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray Condition Suggested Solutions Wrinkles or e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly creases Check the paper type and quality see Print media _ specifications on page 249 Aat bCc Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating AaEbCc the paper 180 in the tray AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc Back of Check for leaking toner Clean the inside of the machine printouts are dirty AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc BbCc BbCc_ Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative Solid Color or Black pages e The imaging unit may not be installed properly Remove the imaging unit and reinsert it e The imaging unit may be defective and need replacing Remove the imaging unit and install a new one Contact a service representative e The machine may require repair Contact a service representative 9 Troubleshooting 221 i Solving other problems Condition Loose toner AaBbCc AaBbCc AaSbCc AR YCC Adi Sc Suggested Solu
160. eedback helps the manufacturer improve the machine through updates or patches 1 Introduction Understanding the pop up keyboard You can enter letters numbers or special symbols using the pop up keyboard on the display screen This keyboard uses the standard QWERTY layout for ease of use When you touch an input area the keyboard pops up on the screen The keyboard initially shows lowercase letters o CD Shift key Tap this key to enter one upper case letter Tap this key twice to toggle caps lock Symbol Numeric Mode Tap this key to enter numbers symbols and emoticons ABC Mode Tap this key to return the keyboard layout to the default letter keys Use the Shift key cos to toggle between lower case and upper case letters Space bar tara Tap this key to enter a space 1 Introduction EI Installing the driver locally A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using the cable If your machine is attached to a network skip the following Windows steps below and go on to installing a network connected machine s driver 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and Theinstallation window in this User s Guide may differ depending on the powered on 4 machine and interface in use Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive a Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters 118 inches 2 If the installatio
161. el might be low or uneven Shake the toner cartridge Inquire at a Samsung distributor or your retailer Try a different print resolution setting Visit www samsung com supplies Select your country region Replace the toner cartridge to view product service information Where can download the machine s driver balag The status LED flashes or remains constantly on e You can get help support application machine drivers Turn the product off and on again manuals and order information from the Samsung website www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or e Check the meanings of LED indications in this manual and Downloads troubleshoot accordingly see Understanding the LEDs on page 26 About this user s guide This user s guide provides information for your basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed steps to explain machine usage Do not discard this manual and keep it for future reference Read the safety information before using the machine If you have a problem using the machine refer to the troubleshooting chapter Terms used in this user s guide are explained in the glossary chapter All illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or model you purchased The screenshots some menus in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the machine s firmware driver version The procedures in this user s guide are mainly based
162. en oe AH BEE H AZ tb 4 iit e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected 11 Appendix 260 Regulatory information Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help Taiwan only WA Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the KOREAN aE equipment Bote ANG KIN RANA SERIA KE ERROR NE HEAR gt MADRE RAE ROME i sns 3 BALE PARR RAT eee RABE Canadian radio interference regulations RRE TABANG gt ENTRIES gt MESS E FER AE This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise ARATE gt HUKARERE TFR LAAR DEE o emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference causing a a case om equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus ICES 003 of the Industry and Science Canada Cet appareil num rique respecte les limites de bruits radio lectriques Russia Kazakhstan Belaru only applicables aux appareils numeriques de Class A prescrites dans la norme sur le mat riel brouilleur Appareils Num riques ICES 003 dict e par l Industrie et Sciences Canada l H Narotoswrenb xCamcyhr Inextponurc Ko TA A x MataH foHr 129 CamcyHr po Exrroxr ry r Cyaou K8Hru no Pecny6
163. entation of the original Upright Images Use this setting for an original document loaded with the top toward the back of the machine Sideways Images Use this setting for an original document loaded into the DSDF with the top of the document toward the left side of the machine or an original document placed on the scanner glass with the top of the document toward the right side of the machine Original type Use this setting to improve copy quality by selecting the appropriate document type for the current job Text Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images Text Photo Use if the original is a mix of text and images Photo Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images N up Reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 16 pages onto one sheet of paper Off Disable this feature N Up Copies the specified number of pages from the original onto one sheet of paper Orientation You can select the direction in which information is copied on a page LU Booklet The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper which are then folded to produce a booklet with all pages in the correct sequence The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each image to fit on the selected paper Off Disables this feature 1 Sided Originals Copy one side of the original to one sheet of a booklet 2 Sided Originals Book Copy each side of an original to one sheet of a
164. eport gt Usage Counter gt Print from the home screen or Apps OR Select the Information tab gt Usage Counters from the SyncThru Web Service 2 Check the serial number 4 Maintenance Clearing memory There are few ways to clear memory to ensure the memory capacity of your Clearing fax memory without printing afax job machine Select one of the ways below 2 If you clear fax memory without checking the fax job by printing it first you Clearina stored documents might erase jobs that you do not want to Be careful not to erase important g documents Check the stored documents before clearing machine memory Tap Job Status from the home screen or Apps 1 Tap Box from the main screen 1 j 2 Select the Current Job tab from the display screen 2 Touch and hold folder or document you want to erase from the list 3 Select the job s you want to erase than press Delete 3 Tap ka gt Delete If you want to erase all the jobs press Delete All Clearing fax memory When the fax memory is full you can erase stored fax memory There are two ways to erase the fax memory follow the steps below To erase only fax jobs on the list select fax jobs with in the Job Type list and click Delete Clearing fax memory by printing a fax job Print received fax es Fax memory will automatically be erased 4 Maintenance ga Cleaning the machine If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a d
165. er Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine Use a dry lint free cloth to clean the machine Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord Wait for the machine to cool down If your machine has a power switch turn the power switch off before cleaning the machine Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 4 Maintenance 1350 Cleaning the machine 4 Maintenance 351 Cleaning the machine Cleaning the pickup roller 2 e Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord Wait for the machine to cool down If your machine has a power switch turn the power switch off before cleaning the machine e Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 4 Maintenance 352 Cleaning the machine Cleaning the scan unit Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed 2 e Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord Wait for the machine to cool down If your machine has a power switch turn the power switch off before cleaning the machine e Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front
166. er problems Condition Paper does not feed into the machine Suggested solutions e Remove any obstructions from inside the machine e Paper has not been loaded correctly Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly e There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray e The paper is too thick Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine see Print media specifications on page 249 e Ifan original does not feed into the machine the DSDF rubber pad may require to be replaced Contact a service representative The paper keeps jamming e There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray If you are printing on special materials use the multi purpose tray An incorrect type of paper is being used Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine see Print media specifications on page 249 There may be debris inside the machine Open the front door and remove any debris If an original does not feed into the machine the DSDF rubber pad may need to be replaced Contact a service representative Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes Printing problems Condition The machine does not print Possible cause The machine is not receiving power Suggested solutions Check the power cord connections Check the power sw
167. es of curl in any direction Condition Do not use labels with wrinkles bubbles or other indications of separation Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing which can cause paper jams Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled bubbled or damaged Do not load paper that does not have space between labels running the same direction as the paper is being fed Otherwise it could cause paper jams 2 Media and Tray Printing on special media Card stock Custom sized paper Preprinted paper When loading preprinted paper the printed side should be facing up with an uncurled edge at the front If you experience problems with paper feeding turn the paper around Note that print quality is not guaranteed Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm 3 8 inches wide or 148 mm 5 8 inches long In the software application set margins to at least 6 4 mm 0 25 inches away from the edges of the material Must be printed with heat resistant ink that will not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine s fusing temperature for 0 1 second about 170 C 338
168. ess when you configure the DHCP server on the access point or wireless router Then you can always use the IP address that is set with the MAC address You can identify the Mac address of your machine by printing a network configuration report Check the wireless environment You might not be able to connect to the network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a user s information before connecting to the access point or wireless router This machine only supports IEEE 802 11 b g n and Wi Fi Other wireless communication types e g Bluetooth are not supported The machine is within the range of the wireless network The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless signal Remove any large metal objects between the access point or wireless router and the machine Make sure the machine and wireless access point or wireless router are not separated by poles walls or support columns containing metal or concrete The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may interfere with the wireless signal Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal including a microwave oven and some Bluetooth devices Whenever the configuration of your access point or wireless router changes you must do the product s wireless network setup again The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi Fi Direct is 4 3 Network Setup Using the NFC feature Optiona
169. ettings gt Management gt Supplies Life from the main screen Check the consumables life N Werecommend you prepare new supplies or those that you have used over 90 of their average yield see Replacing amp redistributing supplies on page 346 From the SyncThru Web Service From the SyncThru Web Service select the Information tab 5 Supplies 2 Check the remaining percentage KU We recommend you prepare new supplies if the remaining percentage is less than 10 96 see Replacing amp redistributing supplies on page 346 4 Maintenance go Setting supplies reorder notification Set the supplies reorder notification to receive notification emails and prepare supplies in advance See Supplies Management on page 290 4 Maintenance 345 Replacing amp redistributing supplies Replacing the toner cartridge When the toner cartridge is totally empty The status LED turns red on and the display screen shows the error message of replacing toner The machine stops printing and incoming faxes are saved in memory However when the toner cartridge is empty but you can still print black and white print jobs The submitted job must be in black and white Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine see Ordering supplies and accessories on page 233 At this stage the toner cartridge needs to be replaced Be sure to prepare new toner cartridge in advance see Or
170. f your machine see Settings tab on page 162 Protocol Tap to use IPv6 protocol in the system Reboot the machine to apply the change IPv6 Address Shows the IPv6 address types Link local Address This is an IPv6 address starting with a prefix value FE80 This address has local link scope and is automatically generated Stateless Address This is an IPv6 address which is formed by router advertised prefix and interface identifier On a interface like Ethernet interface identifier is usually derived from the Mac address of the machine The advertised prefix depends on the router configurations More than one address may be configured for the router advertisement but only one will be displayed in the display screen sad 3 Network Setup Network settings configuring TCP IP Stateful Address This is an IPv6 address which is acquired by a DHCPv6 Tap Settings gt Network Settings gt Ethernet gt 802 1x from the home screen server or Apps Manual Address This is an IPv6 address which an administrator can configure manually DHCPv6 Configuration Select the DHCPv6 configuration you want to us Use DHCP as directed by a router DHCPv6 is enabled when a router advertises to use DHCPv6 Always Enable DHCP Regardless of router advertisement use DHCPv6 to acquire an IPv6 address Never use DHCP Disables DHCPv6 DHCPv6 Unique Identifier Clients use an DHCP Unique Identifier DUID to obtain an IP ad
171. faxes Select Auto Detection to automatically detect the environment or manually specify the faxing environment as Normal VoIP Office Noise Home or Big Noise Initialize Diagnostics Settings Resets all the settings a May only be available for the administrator depending on the authentication settings selected see Authentication on page 289 6 Scan amp Send Faxing nat 7 Setting up an Address Book This guide gives you guidelines for the address book e Understanding the address screen e Using the control panel e Using SyncThru Web Service Understanding the address screen The Address book app allows you to access and save frequently used addresses in the machine You can save fax numbers and email addresses as well as Address screen addresses for SMB FTP and so on Tap Address book from the home screen or Apps If want to go home tap the You can save frequently used fax numbers e mail addresses SMB server home ig butoh addresses FTP server addresses in your machine D panang 2 Contacts Favorites Groups KU e Click the 7 Help from the home screen or quick menu and then click on any option you want to know about You can set general options see Setting options on page 112 No contacts i lt ci Contacts Displays the name and contact information of contacts saved in the address book Favorites Displays the name and contact information of c
172. first to check then print the rest of the copies later Confidential This mode is used for printing confidential documents You need to enter a password to print Store Select this setting to save a document in the mass storage device without printing Store and Print This mode is used when printing and storing document at the same time 3 Printing Opening printing preferences Using a favorite setting The Favorites option which is visible on each preferences tab except for the Favorites tab and Samsung tab allows you to save the current preferences for future use To save a Favorites item follow these steps 1 Change the settings as needed on each tab 2 Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box Favorites test Orientation x Landscape Layout Options x Layout Poster Printing Post 3 Click Save 4 Enter name and description and then select the desired icon 5 Click OK When you save Favorites all current driver settings are saved settings select it in the Favorites tab and click Delete WA To use a saved setting select it in the Favorites tab The machine is now set to print according to the settings you have selected To delete saved Click the option you want to know on the Printing Preferences window and press F1 on your keyboard 3 Printing Using special print features Special print features include 1 To change the print sett
173. g com latin support Spanish EL SALVADOR www samsung com latin_en support English ESTONIA 800 7267 www samsung com ee support FINLAND 030 6227 515 www samsung com fi support FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 www samsung com fr support 0180 6 SAMSUNG bzw www samsung com 0180 6 7267864 de support GERMANY HHP 0180 6 M SAMSUNG bzw 0180 6 67267864 0 20 Anruf aus dem dt Festnetz aus dem Mobilfunk max 0 60 Anruf GEORGIA 0 800 555 555 www samsung com support GHANA 0302 200077 africa_en support 80111 SAMSUNG 80111 726 www samsung com GREECE 7864 only from land UNEARI gr support 210 6897691 from mobile and land line 1 800 299 0013 www samsung com 1 800 299 0033 latin support Spanish GUATEMALA www samsung com latin_en support English 800 2791 9267 www samsung com 800 2791 9111 latin support Spanish HONDURAS www samsung com latin_en support English 852 3698 4698 www samsung com hk support Chinese HONG KONG www samsung com hk_en support English Contact SAMSUNG worldwide g3 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center WebSite Country Region Customer Care Center WebSite 0680SAMSUNG 0680 7 26 www samsung com KENYA 0800 545 545 www samsung com HUNGARY 786 0680PREMIUM 0680 7 73 hu support support 648 183 CALL 183 2255 www samsung com 1800 3000 8282 Toll Free1800
174. g settings Installing driver over the network Wireless network setup Optional Using the NFC feature Optional Supported Mobile Apps AirPrint Google Cloud Print Network environment You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding port on your machine Item Network protocols You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine You can set up the basic network settings through the machine s control panel The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine Item Network interface Specification Ethernet 10 100 1000 Base TX Wired Lan Network Interface 802 1 1b g n wireless LAN 8 Near Field Communication NFC a Optional device Network operating system Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2008 R2 Various Linux OS Various Unix OS Mac OS X 10 5 10 9 Novell NetWare 5 x 6 X Specification TCP IPv4 DHCP BOOTP DNS WINS Bonjour SLP UPnP Standard TCP IP Printing RAW LPR IPP FTP SMB SMTP WSD LDAP Kerberos 802 1x SNMPv 1 2 3 HTTP IPSec TCP IPv6 DHCP DNS RAW LPR SNMPv 1 2 3 HTTP IPSec 3 Network Setup 304 Accessing network setup 1 Make sure that the ethernet cable is connected to your machine 2 Tap Settings gt Network Settings gt Ethernet from the home screen or Apps 3 Log in as an administrator s
175. ge in gray Color Displays an image in color 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 114 Understanding the Scan 4 Send screen The file format JPEG cannot be selected in the File Format option if Mono has been selected for Color Mode Image Adjustment This option allows you to manually adjust the image Darkness Allows you to adjust the darkness of the scanned output file This feature is useful when scanning faded originals or originals with little contrast Sharpness Allows you to adjust the edges of text so that it is easier to read You can also use this feature to enhance the details of images e Contrast allows you to adjust the contrast to make the scanned output crisper or smoother You can use this feature to improve the quality of an image or increase the readability of text Background Adjustment This option allows you to compensate for originals that contain color in the background such as newspapers or catalogs You can use the options in this menu to make the copies easier to read e Background Density Allows you to adjust the density of the background in the scanned image This feature is useful when scanning originals that have turned yellow from age or originals with a dark background e Backside Image Allows you to erase any text or images that show through from the other side of the original You can use this feature to ensure that your scanned output is clearly legible 5 Scan amp Send Scanning
176. ger interface is comprised of various basic sections as described in the table that follows 8 Management Tools Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Printer information This area gives you general information about your machine You can check information such as the machine s model name IP address or Port name and machine status K You can view the online User s Guide Troubleshooting button This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs You can directly open the necessary section in the user s guide Application information Includes links for changing to the advanced settings switching Ul refresh preference setting summary help and about K The 3 button is used to change the user interface to the advanced settings user interface see Advanced settings user interface overview on page 172 Quick links Displays Quick links to machine specific functions This section also includes links to applications in the advanced settings 4 KU If you connect your machine to a network the SyncThru Web Service icon is enabled Contents Displays information about the selected machine remaining area toner level and paper The information will vary based on the a machine selected Some machines do not have this feature Order Click on the Order button from the supply ordering window 6 supplies You can order replacement toner cartridge s from online KU Select
177. ges that show through from the other side of the original You can use this feature to ensure that your scanned output is clearly legible 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 133 Understanding the fax screen 2 Groups Open a list of group addresses Fax X Cancel 7 Done 1 Contacts Open a list of your contacts v B 2 B ee Favorites Recent Groupe Contacts Pause Pause the current job Add Contacts Add a new contact to your addresses Add To Add to the destination list B Destination List Open the destination list On Hook Enable On Hook dialing When you hear the dial LA tone enter a fax number using the numeric keypad on the screen KA Send Send the fax Command keys Button Name Description keypad Open the keypad o Favorites Open a list of frequently used addresses B Recent View any recently used addresses 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 134 Sending a fax This section explains how to send a fax and the special methods of transmission WA You can place the originals use either the DSDF or the scanner glass If the originals are placed on both the DSDF and the scanner glass the machine will read the originals on the DSDF first because it has higher scan priority Setting the fax header In some countries you are required by law to specify your fax number on any fax you send w N N Aa wl A Tap Settings gt Fax Settings gt Machine ID amp Fax
178. ging unit on page 189 End of life Replace with new toner cartridge The indicated toner cartridge has reached its estimated cartridge life Replace the toner cartridge with a Samsung genuine toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 187 Engine System Failure error number Turn off then on Engine Failure error number Call for service if the problem persists There is a problem in the engine system Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Fan Failure error number Turn off then on Call for service if the problem persists There is a problem in the fan system Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Front door is open Close it The door is not securely latched Close the door until it locks into place 9 Troubleshooting 208 Understanding display messages Message Fuser Failure error number Turn off then on Fuser Unit Failure error number Turn off then on Meaning There is a problem in the fuser unit Suggested solutions Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Message Input System Failure error number Pull tray number out and insert it Meaning There is a problem in the tray Suggested solutions Open and close the tray If the problem persists call fo
179. good cable If necessary replace the printer cable e Check that the scanner is configured correctly Check scan setting in the application you want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port for example USB001 The unit scans very slowly e Check if the machine is printing received data If so scan the document after the received data has been printed e Graphics are scanned more slowly than text Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting It will help to increase the speed For details about how to set BIOS refer to your computer user s guide 9 Troubleshooting 224 i Solving other problems Condition Message appears on your computer screen Device can t be set to the H W mode you want Port is being used by another program Port is disabled Scanner is busy receiving or printing data When the current job is completed try again Invalid handle Scanning has failed Suggested solutions There may be a copying or printing job in progress Try your job again when that job is finished The selected port is currently being used Restart your computer and try again e The machine printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off e The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment i
180. he paper list on the display screen The paper lists are divided into the available A B type and letter type paper in this machine 2 Media and Tray 15o Setting the paper size and type If there is no required size paper or you need to use custom sized paper tap the cardinal point arrows to set the paper size You can also set and save the custom size using Custom Size You can select the custom size whenever you need it Paper Type Allows you to change the paper type Options Scroll through the options by swiping up and down Auto Tray Switch Determine whether or not the machine continues printing when it detects the paper does not match For example if both tray 1 and tray 2 are filled with the same size paper the machine automatically prints from tray 2 after the tray 1 runs out of paper Auto Continue This option allows you to continue printing when the paper size you have set is mismatched with the paper in the tray When this option is activated the machine continues printing using similar or large size paper If this option is inactivated the machine waits until the required size paper is loaded in the tray Paper Substitution When the requested paper for a print job is not available in the tray this feature allows you to substitute similar paper size For example if the requested letter sized paper is not available in the tray this machine substitutes A4 for the requested paper K When the paper is substitut
181. he problem is Paper feeding problems corrected If the problem persists contact a service representative Other problems include Condition Suggested solutions See Display screen problem on page 214 Paper jams during Clear the paper jam see Clearing jams on page 192 See Paper feeding problems on page 214 printing See Printing problems on page 215 Paper sticks together 8 Checkthe maximum paper capacity of the tray see See Printing quality problems on page 218 Print media specifications on page 249 Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper see Print media specifications on page 249 See Copying problems on page 223 See Scanning problems on page 224 Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper See Operating system problems on page 227 e Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together Try a fresh ream of paper See Faxing problems on page 225 Multiple sheets of e Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray Display screen problem paper do not feed Load paper of only one type size and weight e If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam clear the paper jam see Clearing jams on page 192 Condition Suggested solutions Thedisplayscreendoes Adjusts the brightness of the display screen not show anything Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service 9 Troubleshooting 214 Solving oth
182. hine is connected to the network then verify the LAN connection again 2 3 If a network connection problem persists contact your network administrator If you installed an optional fax kit or finisher press each Test button for verify connection of them Network Settings Enter the IP address Subnet Mask Gateway Host Name Domain Name Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server in each field Then tap Next K If a new IP address is assigned automatically by a DHCP or BOOTP press DHCP or BOOTP If you are not sure about your network environment contact your network administrator SNMP Configuration Enter the Community Name Access Permission Authentication User Name Authentication Password Authentication Confirm Password Privacy Password and Privacy Confirm Password in each field Then tap Done You can set the default fax options Set the most frequently used fax settings Tap Settings 5 Fax Settings from the display screen see General fax settings on page 139 2 Ifthe optional fax is not installed the fax icon will not appear on the display screen e The fax options are different from country to country depending on the International Communications Regulatory If some of the fax options explained in the instructions have been grayed out it means that the grayed out option is not supported in your communication environment e You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web
183. hine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on connect to the access point or wireless router varies depending on the a Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS enabled access point or wireless router access point or wireless router you are using Refer to the user s guide of the access point or wireless router you are using When using the WPS button to set the wireless network security settings may change To prevent this lock the WPS option for the current wireless security settings The option name may differ depending on the access point or wireless router you are using Items to prepare Check if the access point or wireless router supports Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Check if your machine supports Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Networked computer PIN mode only 3 Network Setup 321 Wireless network setup Optional Connecting WPS Factory default in your machine is PBC mode which is recommended for a typical wireless network environment Connecting in PBC mode 1 2 Tap Settings gt Network Settings gt Wi Fi from the home screen or App Type in the ID and Password Use the same login ID Password Domain as when logging in from the machine see Log in on page 280 If you want to create a new user or change the password see Security tab on page 163 Tap WPS Settings 5 Connect via PBC Press the WPS PBC button on the access point or wireless router Foll
184. hone and electronic specialty stores When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers use a non emergency number to advise the emergency service dispatcher of your intentions The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack USOC RJ 11C Replacing the Fitted Plug for UK Only Important The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard BS 1363 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse When you change or examine the fuse you must re fit the correct 13 amp fuse You then need to replace the fuse cover If you have lost the fuse cover do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover Contact the people from you purchased the machine The 13 amp plug is the most widely used in the UK and should be suitable However some buildings mainly old ones do not have normal 13 amp plug sockets You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor Do not remove the moulded plug A If you cut off the moulded plug get rid of it straight away You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket Important warning You must earth this machine 5 The wires in the mains lead have the following color code
185. hotograph or text etc which is copied reproduced or translated to produce others but which is not itself copied or derived from something else Open Systems Interconnection OSI is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization ISO for communications OSI offers a standard modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable self contained functional layers The layers are from top to bottom Application Presentation Session Transport Network Data Link and Physical PABX A private automatic branch exchange PABX is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise PCL Printer Command Language PCL is a Page Description Language PDL developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard Originally developed for early inkjet printers PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal dot matrix printer and laser printers PDF Portable Document Format PDF is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format Glossary Glossary PostScript Protocol PostScript PS is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas that is run in an interpreter to generate an image Printer Driver A program used to
186. i Direct enabled supported mobile apps installed mobile device with Android 4 0 or higher 3 Network Setup 339 AirPrint Only AirPrint certified machines can use the AirPrint feature Check the box your machine came in for the AirPrint certified mark AirPrint allows you to print directly from iPhone iPad and iPod touch running the latest version of iOS AlrPring Setting up AirPrint Bonjour mDNS and IPP protocols are required on your machine to use the AirPrint feature You can enable the AirPrint feature by one of the following methods 1 Check whether the machine is connected to the network 2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer Safari or Firefox and enter your machine s new IP address in the browser window For example http 192 168 1 133 3 Click Login in the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website Type in the ID and Password and select the Domain Then click on LOGIN Use the same login ID Password Domain as when logging in from the machine see Log in on page 280 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens click Settings gt Network Settings Click AirPrint Printing via AirPrint For example the iPad manual provides these instructions 1 2 3 4 E Open your email photo web page or document you want to print Touch the action icon ital Select your printer driver name and option menu to set up Touch Print button Print it out Cance
187. ic Document Feeder ADF Features by model Features M458x series Multi send Delay send Duplex send Secure receive Duplex print Scanning to email Scanning to SMB server Scanning to FTP server Scan to PC Scan to USB Duplex scan Features by model Features M458x series ID card copying Reduced or enlarged copying Booklet Poster Imaging Repeat Watermark Stamp N up Erase Edge Overlay Image Shift e Duplex copy a Depending on your country wireless LAN card may not be available For some countries only 802 11 b g can be applied Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your machine b You can only print files stored on a USB Drive device Supported o Optional Blank Not supported Useful to know WE The machine does not print A paper jam has occurred Open the print queue list and remove the document from the Open and close the cover see Front view on page 21 list e Check the instructions on removing jammed paper in this Remove the driver and install it again see Installing the driver manual and troubleshoot accordingly locally on page 39 Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows E l 4 Printouts are blurry my Where can I purchase accessories or supplies The toner lev
188. ices that supports Samsung Printer Experience Under the device you can see the latest scanned images Your machine needs to be connected to a network to scan from here This section is for the users with multi functional printers Adding Deleting Printers If you do not have any printer added to the Samsung Printer Experience or if you want to add delete a printer follow the instructions below 9 You can only add delete network connected printers Adding a printer 1 From the Charms select Settings Or right click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select Settings 2 Select Add Printer 3 Select the printer you want to add You can see the added printer K If you see mark you can also click mark to add printers 8 Management Tools Using Samsung Printer Experience Deleting a printer Select the printer settings such as the number of copies and orientation monet ae 5 Click the Print button to start the print job 1 rom the Charms select Settings Or right click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select Settings 2 Select Remove Printer 3 Select the printer you want to delete 4 Click Yes You can see that the selected printer is removed from the screen Printing from Windows 8 This section explains common printing tasks from the Start screen Basic printing 1 Open the document to print 2 From the Charms select Devices 3 Select y
189. ick but it produces better results Altitude Adjustment You can choose the altitude of the place where your Full Changes the color table entirely to adjust the color tone machine is located The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level e Machine Test Allows you to adjust the tone level PEE AE A T T E AE Print Adjustment Allows you to adjust the print area When images are Normal 0 1 000 m 3 280 ft printed off the page or shifted adjust the print area High1 1 000 m 3 280 ft 2 000 m 6 561 ft High2 2 000 m 6 561 ft 3 000m 9 842 ft High3 3 000 m 9 842 ft 4 000 m 13 123 ft Power Saver High4 4 000 m 13 123 ft 5 000 m 16 404 ft F 3 a mi i When you are not using the machine for a while use this option to save power Humidity Optimizes print quality according to the humidity in the environment 9 The Power Save option can be wake up by pressing the display screen Custom Color Allows you to adjust the level of print density and copy darkness Tone Adjustment Allows you to automatically adjust the color tone to produce the best possible print quality Auto Tone Adjustment Activation Instructs the machine to automatically calibrate the tone at certain intervals Activate this option to perform a normal or full tone adjustment after a certain number or pages are printed or the machine is not used for a certain per
190. ill be sent through SMTP server you set here This feature is also available from the machine see Network Protocol on page 299 8 Management Tools 162 SyncThru Web Service HTTP You can allow or block users from accessing the SyncThru Web Service This feature is also available from the machine see Network Protocol on page 299 Proxy You can set proxy settings and enable authentication to connect to licence server through http proxy server These proxy settings are provided currently only if the administrator wants to update an XOA application s license online through proxy server The security tab has System Security Network Security User Access Control and System Log You cannot access this tab if you do not log in as an administrator see Log in on page 280 System Security From the SyncThru Web Service select the Security tab 5 System Security System Administrator Enter the system administrator s information The machine sends email notification to the email address set here This feature is also available from the machine see Contact Information on page 302 Feature Management You can enable disable network features Check the features you want to enable and click Apply Information Hiding You can enable disable network features Check the features you want to enable and click Apply Restart Device You can reboot your machine Click the Restart Now button to reboot Network Security Fr
191. ination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five L indice d equivalence de la sonnerie IES sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent etre raccordes a une interface telephonique La terminaison d une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs a la seule condition que la somme d indices d equivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n excede pas cinq Fax Branding The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the following information 1 the date and time of transmission 2 identification of either business business entity or individual sending the message and 3 telephone number of either the sending machine business business entity or individual 11 Appendix 262 Regulatory information The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68 If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company c
192. ing 193 Clearing jams If you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to next step If you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to next step 9 Troubleshooting 194 Clearing jams In the multi purpose tray 9 Troubleshooting 195 Clearing jams Inside the machine A The Fuser area is HOT please wait until device cools down before accessing this area Turn power off to cool the machine down Take care when removing paper from the machine K Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 9 Troubleshooting 196 Clearing jams 9 Troubleshooting Clearing jams If you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to next step 9 Troubleshooting 198 Clearing jams In the exit area A The Fuser area is HOT please wait until device cools down before accessing this area Turn power off to cool the machine down Take care when removing paper from the machine 9 Troubleshooting 199 Clearing jams If you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to next step 9 Troubleshooting 200 Clearing jams In the duplex unit area 9 Troubleshooting 201 Clearing jams If you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to next step 9 Troubleshooting 202 Clearing jams Clearing original document jams
193. ing method provided by the SyncThru Web Admin Service For detailed information refer to the SyncThru Web Admin Service guide General Settings Allows you to set up the genaral settings Measurement You can choose the measuring unit and default paper size Supplies Management Allows you to set options for supplies reorder notification If you set this option the machine will display a warning message when the supplies are running out Prepare the supplies in advance Imaging Unit Reorder Notification Issues a notification when the 4 imaging unit has the specified lifespan remaining Toner Cartridge Reorder Notification Issues a notification when a toner cartridge has the specified lifespan remaining Toner Save The Toner Save setting allows the user to save printing toner when printing a document 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 290 Admin Settings Contention Management Allows you to set Copy Print Send Report priority or first in first out More Settings You can set Job Progress Window Job Deletion Job Progress Window Allows you to show job progress in display Job Deletion The Job Deletion setting specifies whether users can delete all jobs or only the jobs that they create Allow all jobs to delete All users allow all jobs to delete Allow only own jobs to delete Users allow only own jobs to delete Home Screen Lock Administrators can limit a user s abili
194. ing percentage of each supply Demo Page Print demo page to check if the machine is working properly ex Toner cartridge Imaging unit You can also select A4 or letter Error Information Print to check what errors have occurred in the machine Error types and counts are included Report Network Configuration Print to see the network configuration information Network configuration information such as TCP IP Raw This feature allows you to print all the reports provided by your machine You TCP IP and LPD information are printed can use these reports to help you maintain your machine Account Print to see the account list Send Send Confirmation You can set the machine to print a report whether a send was successfully completed or not Fax Received Print to check the list of faxes received 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 295 Management Fax Sent Print to check the list of faxes sent Fax Scheduled Jobs Print to check the list of scheduled fax jobs Email Sent Print to check the transmission state of the Scan to Email job Font PCL Font List Print to see the PCL font list PS Font List Print to see the PS font list 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 296 Network Settings This option is setting the Network Settings functions Feature Description Protocol You can enable disable IPv6 protocol 2 e Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or m
195. ings from your software application access o Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 66 Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper on page 74 Printing posters on page 74 2 Click the Basic tab select Multiple Pages per Side in the Type drop down list Printing booklets on page 75 Printing on both sides of the paper on page 76 3 Select Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet Change the size by percentage of your document on page 77 4 Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet 2 4 6 9 or 16 Fitting your document to a selected paper size on page 77 in the Pages per Side drop down list Using watermarks on page 78 5 Select the page order from the Page Order drop down list if necessary Using overlay on page 80 Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper To print Printing posters more than one page per sheet the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet 6 Click the Paper tab select the Original size Source and Type 7 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window This feature allows you to print a single page document onto 4 9 or 16 sheets of paper for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster size document kA ob A 3x3 3 Printing Using s
196. installation begins Viewing an application in details 1 Tap the application name you want to view in details 2 View the application s information in details Enabling Disabling an application Select the application you want to enable disable and press Enable Disable The application you selected is enabled disabled 2 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 294 Management 2 e Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or 2 You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the models If so it is not applicable to your machine Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of Click the Help from the home screen or E quick menu and your machine Ahen SyncThru Web Service opens click Information gt Print information see Information tab on page 161 then click on any option you want to know about System You can checking the supplies life and printing report Configuration Print to see the machine configuration information Product information version information product setting and paper Tap Settings gt Management from the home screen or Apps setting are included Supplies Information Print to check remaining percentage of each supply Usage Counter Print to check the count of the jobs performed Print usage scan usage and fax usage information are included Supplies Life This feature allows you to check the remain
197. iod 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 284 Machine Performance Optimization When this option is On you can wake up the machine from the power saving mode with the following actions Pressing Power Wakeup on the control panel Loading paper in a tray Opening or closing the cover Pulling a tray out or pushing a tray in Place the originals in the DSDF Plug in the USB Drive device Low Power Save Low Power Save option allows your machine to save power When you are not using the machine for a while some parts of the machine automatically enter Low Power Save option Low Power Save option conserves less power than Power Save option Power Save When you are not using the machine for a while use this option to save power The machine conserves more power in Power Save option than in Low Power Save mode Timers administrator only When there is no input for a certain period of time the machine cancels the held job or exits the current menu and goes in to the default settings You can set the amount of time the machine will wait before it cancels a held job or exits the current menu WA You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click Settings 5 Machine Settings gt System gt Setup System Timeout The machine returns to the Copy menu if
198. is a card installed inside the machine to allowa third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader Those devices allow the pay for print service on your machine FTP A File Transfer Protocol FTP is acommonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP IP protocol such as the Internet or an intranet Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media It consists of a heat roller and a pressure roller After toner is transferred onto the paper the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer Glossary 369 Glossary Gateway IEEE A connection between computer networks or between a computer network and a telephone line It is very popular as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network Grayscale The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE is an international non profit professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity IEEE 1284 A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale colors are represented by various shades of gray Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots
199. is packed or unpacked Keep it away from moisture or other conditions that can cause it to wrinkle or curl Keep it in a temperatures between 15 C 30 C and humidity between 10 70 4 Maintenance 1355 Tips for moving the machine e When moving or storing the machine press the unlock button to fold down the control panel The unlock button is located on the top side of the control panel A e When moving the machine do not subject the control panel to hard impacts as this may damage the screen or border of the control panel e The warranty does not cover damage from falls or impacts due to the intentional or unintentional actions of the user e When moving the machine do not tilt or turn it upside down Otherwise the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner which can cause damage to the machine or reduce print quality e When moving the machine make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely 4 Maintenance 1356 Printing a demo page Print a demo page to check the print quality of the machine if you have not used the machine for sometime From the machine See Report on page 295 From the SyncThru Web Service See Information tab on page 161 4 Maintenance i Contact SAMSUNG worldwide If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products contact the Samsung customer care center Country Region 021 36 11 00 Customer Care Center WebSite
200. ishes not remove printer driver printer name files from your system nd or ND Commands not to set the Itindicates installed machine d or D Uninstalls all device This command will remove all installed driver as a default machine driver driver will not be the default machine driver on your system if there are one or more printer drivers installed If there is no installed machine driver on your system then this option won t be applied because Windows OS will set installed printer driver as a default machine driver drivers and applications from your system installed device drivers and application software from your system v lt share name gt or V lt share name gt Shares installed machine and add other available platform drivers for Point amp Print It will install all supported Windows OS platform s machine drivers to system and share it with specified lt share name gt for point and print fo or O Opens Printers and Faxes folder after installation This command will open Printers and Faxes folder after the silent installation 3 Network Setup 315 Installing driver over the network Click Agree to agree to the license agreement Command line Definition Description 7 g g g h H or Shows Command line Usage 8 Click Install All components necessary for machine operations will be installed If you click Customize you can choose individual components to insta
201. istrators 276 Terminology used in this guide 277 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu Log in 280 Language and Input 281 Machine 282 Admin Settings 287 Management 295 Network Settings 297 System 301 3 Network Setup Network environment 304 Accessing network setup 305 Network settings configuring TCP IP Print settings Ports to set for network printing Set protocols Network filtering settings Installing driver over the network Wireless network setup Optional Using the NFC feature Optional Supported Mobile Apps AirPrint Google Cloud Print 4 Maintenance Monitoring the supplies life Setting supplies reorder notification Replacing amp redistributing supplies Finding the serial number Clearing memory Cleaning the machine Tips for storing machine supplies and paper Tips for moving the machine Printing a demo page 306 309 310 311 312 320 328 338 340 341 344 345 346 347 348 349 355 356 357 1 About this Administrator s Guide This administrator s guide provides advanced information for administrator s to use and manage the machine Your machine provides features that are available only for administrators such as remotely installing the driver or creating the installer package You can also refer to this guide for maintenance information eg cleaning the machine replacing toner cartridges This guide provides instructional screen images easy to read tables of featu
202. itch and the power source The machine is not selected as the default machine Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows Check the machine for the following e The front door is not closed Close the front door Paper is jammed Clear the paper jam see Clearing jams on page 192 No paper is loaded Load paper see Loading paper in the tray on page 50 e The toner cartridge or the imaging unit is not installed Install the toner cartridge or imaging unit If a system error occurs contact your service representative The connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it The connection cable between the computer and the machine is defective If possible attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job You can also try using a different machine cable 9 Troubleshooting gg i Solving other problems Condition The machine does not print Possible cause The port setting is incorrect Suggested solutions Condition Possible cause Check the Windows printer setting to A print job is The job may be very make sure that the print job is sent to extremely complex the correct port If the computer has slow Suggested solutions Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings more than one port make sure that
203. ity program supports PDF version 1 7 and below For Windows 8 from Charms select Search 5 Apps For higher versions you must open the file to print it 2 Find Samsung Printers gt Direct Printing Utility 3 Select your machine from the Select Printer drop down list and click What is Direct Printing Utility Browse 4 Select the file you wish to print and click Open Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly to your machine o to print without having to open the file It sends data through the Windows The file is added in the Select Files section spooler using the port of the printer driver It only supports PDF format 5 Customize the machine settings for your needs To install this program 6 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the machine Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads 3 Printing CI Using direct printing utility Using the right click menu 1 Right click on the PDF file you wish to print and select Direct Printing The Direct Printing Utility window appears with the PDF file is added 2 Select the machine you wish to use 3 Customize the machine settings for your needs 4 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the machine 3 Printing 83 Changing the default print settings 5 Change the settings on each tab Most Windows application
204. ium IBM AIX 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 6 1 7 1 PowerPC 11 Appendix 255 Specifications Requirements Free HDD space Up to 100 MB Network environment You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine Items Specifications Network interface e Ethernet 10 100 1000 Base TX Wired Lan e Network Interface 802 1 1b g n wireless LAN amp Near Field Communication NFC Network operating system e Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2008 R2 e Various Linux OS e Mac OS X 10 5 10 9 e UNIX OS Network protocols e TCP IPv4 e DHCP BOOTP e DNS WINS Bonjour SLP UPnP Standard TCP IP Printing RAW LPR IPP WSD AirPrint Google Cloud Print e SNMPv 1 2 3 HTTP IPSec e TCP IPv6 DHCP DNS RAW LPR SNMPv 1 2 3 HTTP IPSec a Optional device 11 Appendix 256 Regulatory information This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with several regulatory statements Laser safety statement The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825 1 2007 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The l
205. iver features Basic printing Opening printing preferences Using special print features Using direct printing utility Changing the default print settings Setting your machine as a default machine Printing to a file PRN Mac printing Linux printing Unix printing Printer driver features e The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows 7 e Checkthe operating systems that are compatible with your machine see System requirements on page 253 Your printer drivers support the following standard features e Paper orientation size source and media type selection e Number of copies You can also use various special printing features The following table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer drivers Some models or operating system may not support the certain feature s in the following table PCL PS P T b PS Feature XpPs Windows Mac Linux Unix Machine quality option Poster printing O Multiple pages per sheet Booklet printing O PCL PS P z be PS Feature XPS Windows Mac Linux Unix Fit to page printing e Reduce and enlarge printing Different source for first page Cover page options Raster compression PCL only Output options O Watermark Overlay PCL only Double sided e O printing duplex a The PostScript
206. k Cancel to close the window without saving any changes Deleting individual addresses in the address book N VN A U Kb UW Open a web browser from your networked computer Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in the browser for example http 123 123 123 123 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service page Click Login Enter your ID and password and select a domain to log in to Click Login Click Address Book N VN OA UM KM W Open a web browser from your networked computer Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in the browser for example http 123 123 123 123 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service page Click Login Enter your ID and password and select a domain to log in to Click Login Click Address Book 7 Setting up an Address Book 151 Using SyncThru Web Service 8 Check the boxes of the addresses you want to delete and click Delete 8 Enter a name or part of a name to search for in the search field Check the box at the top of the column to select all addresses Click OK in the confirmation window to delete the addresses KU You can search for addresses in a specific category such as Fax Number Email SMB and so on NG E For example if you want to find a fax number click the drop down list next Searching for individual addresses in the address book to Q and select Fax Number 1 Open a web browser from your
207. l 2 If you want to add NFC feature to the machine check the option lists and Requirements contact the purchasing point to order see Available accessories on page 235 When you purchase a Wireless NFC Kit Wireless LAN Option install the kit by following the steps described in the Wireless NFC Kit Wireless LAN Option Guide which is enclosed in the kit After installing the Wireless Kit Wireless LAN Option set the machine to use this feature NFC and Wi Fi Direct enabled supported mobile apps installed mobile device with Android OS 4 0 or higher WA Only Android OS 4 1 or higher will automatically enable the Wi Fi Direct feature on your mobile device when you enable the NFC feature We recommend you to upgrade your mobile device to Android OS 4 1 or higher to use the NFC feature The NFC Near Field Communication printer allows you to directly print from your mobile device just by holding your mobile device over the NFC tag on Wireless NFC Kit Wireless LAN Option It does not require installing print driver or connecting to an access point You just need NFC supported mobile device In order to use this feature mobile apps needs to be installed on your mobile device e D di th terial of th bile devi r NFC recognition KA epending on the material of the mobile device cove gniti Related Apps may not work properly Depending on the mobile device you are using the transmission speed may differ Wi Fi Direct feat
208. lities program must be installed This program is installed when you install the printer driver The following steps are based on the Mac OS X 10 5 or 10 6 Depending on the OS version the following steps may be different Before sending a fax add a fax driver using Fax Queue Creator 1 Open the document you want to send 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select a fax driver from the Printer list 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 124 Using a fax in your computer 4 Ul Choose the number of copies and pages Choose your paper size orientation and scale Enter the recipients fax number in To input box If you have stored frequently used fax numbers you can also use Addresses by pressing the 2 button If necessary enter the access code in Dialing Prefix If necessary check Use Cover page to send the fax with a cover page Enter the subject and message of the fax job Click Fax The Fax Queue icon ____ appears on your Mac dock Click the icon to see the status of the fax job You can also delete hold pause and resume jobs from this window 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 125 Understanding the fax screen Tap Scan amp Send from the home screen or Apps then tap IF to open the Fax screen If you see a different screen tap the Kay icon to go to the home screen KU e Click the 7 Help from the home screen or quick menu and then click on any option you want to know about e You can set the gener
209. ll 1 0 Select Network Connected Printer Wired or Wireless on the Printer J Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered Connection Type and click Continue on 11 Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive list 12 Click IP and Select HP Jetdirect Socket in Protocol 1 3 Enter the machine s IP address in the Address input field 14 Enter the queue name in the Queue input field If you cannot determine the queue name for your machine server try using the default queue first 3 Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop 15 if Auto Select does not work properly choose Select Printer Software and For Mac OS X 10 8 Double click the CD ROM that appears on Finder your machine name in Print Using 4 Double click the MAC_Installer folder gt Installer OS X icon 16 Click Add 5 Click Continue 17 Click Continue 6 Read the license agreement and click Continue 18 After the installation is finished click Close 3 Network Setup gg Installing driver over the network You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to install the printer software http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on Also your machine s IP address should have been set Copy Unified Linux Driver
210. lling print job To cancel the printing job or view the print summary click the print center icon in multitasking area You can click cancel in the print center 3 Network Setup go Google Cloud Print Google Cloud Print is a service that allows you to print to a printer using your 5 Click Login in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service smart phone tablet or any other web connected devices Just register your website Google account with the printer and you are ready to use the Google Cloud Print service You can print your document or email with Chrome OS Chrome 6 _ Type in the ID and Password and select the Domain Then click on browser or a Gmail Google Docs application on your mobile device so you LOGIN don t need to install the printer driver on the mobile device Refer to the Google Use the same login ID Password Domain as when logging in from the website http google com cloudprint learn or http support google com machine see Log in on page 280 cloudprint for more information about Google Cloud Print KA If the network environment is using a proxy server you need to configure the proxy s IP and port number from Settings gt Network Settings gt Registering your Google account to the printer Google Cloud Print gt Proxy Setting Contact your network service provider or network administrator for more information Registering from the Chrome Browser 7 When the Sy
211. lly detects the device and reads data stored on Copies Selects the number of copies it ee About USB Drive device on page 242 pag l Paper Source Select from which tray the paper is used x a ape eae Auto fit Allows you to scale your print job to the selected paper size e Tuemar ue cannot see ee meee USB Drive device Format in the tray regardless of the document size Select a tray and press and then reinsert the USB Drive device into the USB port on your machine On If the machine did not detect your USB Drive when themachine is in 6 Tap O icon to begin printing power save mode Wake up the device and wait until the machine returns to ready state Then reinsert the USB Drive back into the USB port n th font of yourdevic After printing is completed you can remove the USB Drive device from the machine Tap Box gt USB from the home screen or Apps 2 Managin B Driv vi 3 The machine showss all files in the USB Drive device anaging US edevice Touch and hold folder or document you want to print from the list You can delete image files stored on a USB Drive one by one or all at once by reformatting the device 2 If the PDF file you selected is secured with a password you have to know the password for printing Enter the password when the machine requires the secure password If you do not know the password the print job will be cancelled A After deleting files or reformatting a USB Drive de
212. lt gt Zin not allowed 4 Click Login 7 Setting up an Address Book 153 Using SyncThru Web Service 5 3S 59 ON a LS 14 15 Enter your ID and password and select a domain as you log in the machine Click Login Click Address Book Click Groups Click Add Group Enter the group name to be added in Group Name Check Add individual s after this group is created If you do not want to add individual addresses to the group address you made skip this step You can add individual addresses next time pressing Group Details Click Apply Check the addresses you want to add to Group Address Book in Individual Address Book Click the arrow in the middle The selected addresses are added in Group Address Book Click Apply Editing address groups in the address Book U A 59 ON Aa s Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows Click Login Enter the ID and password and select a domain as you log in the machine Click Login Click Address Book Click Groups Check the group address you want to edit and press Edit Group Change the group address information Click Apply Press Undo to delete the information you entered If you press Cancel the Edit window closes 7 Setting up an Addres
213. ly The tray is not securely latched Close the tray until it locks into place a Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated cartridge which indicates the average capacity of print outs and is designed pursuant to ISO IEC 19752 The number of pages may be affected by the percentage of image area operating environment printing interval media type and media size b When the toner cartridge has reached its end of life the machine will stop printing In this case you can choose to stop or continue printing from the SyncThru Web Service Settings gt Machine Settings gt System gt Setup gt Supplies Management gt Toner Cartridge Stop or Samsung Easy Printer Manager Device Settings gt System gt Supplies Management gt Toner Cartridge Stop Turning off this option and continuing to print may damage the device s system 9 Troubleshooting ga Power and cable connecting problems Condition Suggested solutions The machine is not receiving power e Connect the machine to the electricity supply first If the machine has a O Power Wake Up button on the control or the connection cable between the press it computer and the machine is not e Disconnect the machine s cable and reconnect it connected properly 9 Troubleshooting 213 Solving other problems The following chart lists some trouble conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions Follow the suggested solutions until t
214. machine gets overheated it releases smoke makes strange noises or generates an odd odor immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the machine o il personal injury or property damage F Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor Caution Do not attempt e The user should be able to access the power outlet in case of D emergencies that might require the user to pull the plug out This could result in electric shock or fire Do not bend or place heavy objects on the power cord Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy object could result in electric shock or fire Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord do not handle the plug with wet hands This could result in electric shock or fire 1 Introduction 15 Safety information A Caution gt D 0 ka During an electrical storm or for a period of non operation remove the power plug from the electrical outlet This could result in electric shock or fire Be careful the paper output area is hot Burns could occur If the machine has been dropped or if the cabinet appears damaged unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions have been followed unplug the machine from all interf
215. mages or text in the original are perpendicular to the long edge of the page Color Mode Use this option to set the default color mode used for copy jobs Mono Displays an image in black and white Gray Displays an image in gray Color Displays an image in color 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 132 Understanding the fax screen 2 JPEG file format cannot be selected if color mode is set as MONO Image Adjustment This option allows you to manually adjust the image Darkness Allows you to adjust the darkness of the scanned output file This feature is useful when scanning faded originals or originals with little contrast Sharpness Allows you to adjust the edges of text so that it is easier to read You can also use this feature to enhance the details of images Contrast allows you to adjust the contrast to make the scanned output crisper or smoother You can use this feature to improve the quality of an image or increase the readability of text Background Adjustment This option allows you to compensate for originals that contain color in the background such as newspapers or catalogs You can use the options in this menu to make the copies easier to read e Background Density Allows you to adjust the density of the background in the scanned image This feature is useful when scanning originals that have turned yellow from age or originals with a dark background e Backside Image Allows you to erase any text or ima
216. me options under Settings menu see Authentication on page 289 Contact your network service provider or network administrator for more information 1 Tap Settings from the home screen or Apps 2 Select the option you want If the option is available for only the administrator log in screen appears Enter the ID Password and Domain using the pop up keyboard which appears when you tap each field 2 e Enter the ID and password you first set when you turned on the machine see Initial settings administrator only on page 291 e You can also use the ID 2 button to find the recently used ID and domain button to find the domain from the list stored in the machine e When you log in you can see the ID of the logged in user on the display 3 Tap Login 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 280 Language and Input This menu allows you to configure the language in which to display the menus You can also set onscreen keyboard options Tap Settings gt Language and Input from the home screen or Apps When there is no input for a certain period of time the machine cancels the held Te nor job or exits the current menu and goes in to the default settings You can set the eature escription i 2 amount of time the machine will wait before it cancels a held job or exits the Language Allows you to select the language current menu Keyboard amp Input Methods You can change the keyboard used by your machine
217. me screen Tap the Ha icon and tap the Widget tap at the top of the screen Scroll through the list and locate your desired widget Touch and hold the widget icon This creates a copy of the widget and opens the main home screen Drag the widget to the desired position on the screen and release it To move the widget to a different page drag it to the edge of the screen until the screen scrolls to the desired page Removing a widget N Touch and hold a widget until it becomes movable You can drag shortcut and place a shortcut in the trash both items turn red WA This action does not uninstall a widget it only removes the copy from the y home screen 1 Introduction E Display screen and useful menu Moving icons in the Apps menu 3 Tapone of the following options in the next window that appears Gallery Select a wallpaper from photographs and images in the Tap the fili icon to go to the main home screen machine s gallery Tap the HE icon to view your current applications K You can select any images in a USB device or the BOX gt Download folder Live wallpapers Select an animated image Drag the icon to a desired position on the screen and release it To move to a different page drag the icon to the edge of the screen until the Wallpapers Select from several built in stationary images screen scrolls to the desired page 1 2 3 Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not already
218. menus You can also tap and hold a menu icon to move it to a different position or tap Clear All to remove all the menus 5 Scan amp Send Scanning aa Understanding the Scan 4 Send screen Job progress Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine This menu appears whenever the machine is processing a job e Click the Help from the home screen or quick menu and Detail Tap this button to see the status destination sender and time of the then click on any option you want to know about job Preview Area Allows you to see a preview of the document being sent The image in the preview area indicates the current send settings such as the Add Destination orientation and size of the file Tap to add a recipient s email address or a fax number If you want to send Send Feedback Allows you to send feedback about the current send job to SMB FTP Box PC or USB click on respective buttons If you want to receive sending job by email you can set from My page app see Understanding the My Page menu on page 37 Original To use this feature you may need to log in as an administrator see Log in This setting is used to improve the scan quality by selecting the document type on page 280 for the current scan job 1 Sided For originals that are printed on one side only 2 Sided Book For originals that are printed on both sides Setting
219. method of overwriting the disk is specified by US DoD Australian ACSI 33 Select to overwrite the memory 5 times When overwriting 5 times character C and its complement alternatively are used to overwrite the disk After the 2nd time there is a mandatory validation For the 5th time random data is used DoD 5220 22M ECE Select to overwrite the memory 3 times When overwriting three times patterns 0x35 OXCA 0x97 are used to overwrite the disk s content This method of overwriting the diskis specified by US DoD Custom Overwrite Select to determine the number of times the memory will be overwritten The hard disk will be overwritten as many times as the number you select 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu Admin Settings Authentication This feature allows you to choose the authentication method for user authentication 2 You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click the Security tab gt User Access Control see Authentication on page 289 Mode Select the authentication mode Basic Authentication Activate basic authentication Users are asked to login when they select options that are only available to administrators H m I Those options are marked with a or administrator only in this guide Device Authentication Activate devi
220. mputer using 9 Enter a name to add and select a speed dial number in the General field SyncThru Web Service Only for users registered on the machine can store addresses through login SyncThru Web Service FA A Speed Dial Number allows you to enter that number on the numeric keypad to dial that number quickly Check Favorite for addresses you use often You can easily find them in Storing on your local machine search results This method allows you to store addresses on your machine s memory You can 10 Ent r ari email ddress in the Em ilifield add addresses and group them into categories 1 1 Enter a fax number in the Fax field Adding individual addresses to the address book 12 Check the enable SMB box in SMB and enter the SMB information 1 Open a web browser from your networked computer 1 3 Enter a server IP address or a host name in SMB Server Address Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in the browser for example 14 Entera server port number in SMB Server Port http 12 123 123 123 NJ 1 5 Enter a login name in Login Name Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows KU If you want to allow anonymous connections to your SMB or FTP server check the Anonymous box This box is unchecked by default If you checked the Anonymous box go to step 18 Click Login Enter your ID and password and select a domain to log in to Click Login i g 16 Enter a p
221. n Width x Length x Height 530 x 459 5 x 649 mm 20 87 x 18 09 x 25 55 inches Weight Machine with consumables 32 04 kg 70 64 Ibs Noise Level Ready mode Less than 30 dB A Print mode Less than 54 dB A Copy Scan Scanner glass Less than 56 dB A maga Document feeder Less than 56 dB A Temperature Operation 10 to 30 C 50 to 86 F Storage packed 20 to 40 C 4 to 104 F Humidity Operation 20 to 80 RH Storage packed 10 to 90 RH Power rating 110 volt models AC 110 127V 220 volt models AC 220 240 V 11 Appendix Specifications Items Description Power consumption Average operating mode Less than 900 W Ready mode Less than 30 W Power save mode Less than 1 8 W Power off mode Less than 0 45 W mm on TY Dimensions and weight are measured without a handset and other accessories Sound Pressure Level ISO 7779 Configuration tested basic machine installation A4 paper simplex printing China only If the equipment s noise is louder than 63 db A the equipment should be placed in region of relatively independent advice See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage V frequency hertz and of current A for your machine The power consumption may be affected by the machine s status setting conditions operating environment and measuring equipment and method the country uses Power consumption can be completely avoided only when
222. n click Next 5 Follow the instructions in the installation window From the Windows 8 Start Screen 2 2 nn TO The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if your computer is connected to the Internet If not you can manually download the V4 driver from Samsung website www samsung com 5 find your product 5 Support or downloads You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows Store You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store From Charms select Search Click Store Search and click Samsung Printer Experience Click Install If you install the driver using the supplied software CD V4 driver is not installed If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen you can download from the Samsung website www samsung com gt find your product 5 Support or downloads If you want to install Samsung s printer management tools you need to install them using the supplied software CD 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on Also your machine s IP address should have been set 2 From Charms select Settings gt Change PC settings gt Devices 3 Click Add a device Discovered machines will be shown on the screen Click the model name or host name you wish to use a KA You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine s control panel that will show the current machine s host name 5 The driver is automati
223. n window does not appear click Start 5 All programs 5 Accessories gt Run X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive and click OK For Windows 8 If the installation window does not appear from Charms select Search gt Apps and search for Run Type in X Setup exe replacing X with the letter that represents your CD ROM drive and click OK If Tap to choose what happens with this disc pop up window appears click the window and select Run Setup exe Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation window and then click Next 1 Introduction EI Installing the driver locally 4 5 Select USB on the Printer Connection Type screen and then click Next Follow the instructions in the installation window From the Windows 8 Start Screen E e The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if your computer is connected to the Internet If not you can manually download the V4 driver from Samsung website www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or downloads You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows Store You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store 1 From Charms select Search 2 Click Store 3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience 4 Click Install If you install the driver using the supplied software CD V4 driver is not installed If you want to use the V4 dri
224. nalize the machine to suit your usage habits and accessibility needs 1 Introduction 36 Display screen and useful menu To use this feature tap My Page on the home screen or Apps Print MM Copy W Fax W Send W ETC Frequency of Usage Quota Information Print M Me Setting Copy M Fax Send Send Feedback Send Ready to Copy Command keys Button Name Description Quick Menu Open the quick menu Q Search Search for a desired menu or app My Program Open a list of the apps you added Sub menu Open the sub menu A Action overflow Button Name Description Change Allows you to change the password Password 7 Profile Image Allows you to choose an image for your profile Understanding the My Page menu Allows you to modify various settings to make your experience using the machine more enjoyable Personalization Usage The Frequency of Usage graph shows how many print copy fax send or other jobs you have performed while the quota information indicates how close you are to your usage quotas Apps Settings Me Setting The Me Setting setting specifies whether or not the machine sends information about your usage to the Box or another destination You can also specify where your usage information is sent Send Feedback The Send Feedback setting specifies whether or not the machine sends information about your usage to the manufacturer Sending f
225. ncThru Web Service window opens click Settings gt Network Settings gt Google Cloud Print KA e Make sure the printer machine is turned on and connected to a wired or BNG MA wireless network that has access to the Internet 8 Enter your printer s name and description You should create your Google account in the advance 9 Click Register The confirmation pop up window appears Open the Chrome browser Visit www google com 2 If you set the browser to block pop ups the confirmation window will not appear Allow the site to show pop ups Sign in to the Google website with your Gmail address A W N Enter your printer s IP address in the address field and press the Enter key 10 Click Finish printer registration or click Go 3 Network Setup gg Google Cloud Print 11 Click Manage your printers Access the Google Docs application from your mobile device Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print service i at si g Tap the option button of the document that you want to print Google Cloud Print ready devices will appear in the list Tap the send BP button Tap the Cloud Print O button Printing with Google Cloud Print Set the printing options if you want The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you are using You can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print service N A uw BW N Tap Click here to Print Printing
226. ncoming faxes when the machine is unattended In Secure Receive mode all incoming faxes are saved to memory Tap gt or select other settings N 1 Tap Settings 5 Fax Settings 5 Secure Receive on the display screen To deactivate the Secure Receive feature tap Off Incoming faxes will be automatically printed again K Secure Receive mode can only be configured by a user with a registered passcode on the machine When the machine requests enter your passcode 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 138 Receiving a fax Setting Received Fax Printing Use this option to set printing options for received faxes Tap Settings gt Fax Settings gt Received Fax Printing on the display screen Duplex The machine prints received faxes on both sides of the paper Output Tray Specify the tray where the fax is printed Auto Reduction Set to reduce the size of incoming pages automatically When receiving a fax containing pages as long as or longer than the paper loaded in the paper tray the machine can reduce the size of the original to fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine If you do not enable this option the machine cannot reduce the original to fit onto one page The original will be divided and printed in actual size on two or more pages Printing Large Pages Use to fit where faxes are printed Stamp Received Name Print the received fax information on printouts Paper Source Select a tray as the paper source
227. nd settings to the default Scan amp Send settings of the machine This option changes the current Scan amp Send settings to the original settings configured at the factory Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to restore the default Scan amp Send settings Send Settings Allows you to quickly scan a document and send it to a destination The scanned document is sent as an image file Tap this option in the sub menu action overflow menu to scan and attach a file to the current message Filing Policy The Filing Policy setting specifies how the machine handles name conflicts when saving files Print Confirmation Report You can use this feature to get confirmation on executed Scan amp Send destination s successfully or not 2 Ifthe report contains characters or fonts that the machine does not support then Unknown may appear in the report instead of the characters fonts Me Setting Allows you to select the default destination for the send job When logged in you can select your any Send destination as the default send destination Same will appear in Scan amp Send widgets too Send to PC Scans and sends scanned output to a computer Address Book Settings This address book contains contacts that are available to all users You can use the address book to make contacts available to anyone who uses the machine Google Address Book This address book contains the contacts registered in your Google conta
228. ne begins scanning the front side 4 Copying 105 ID card copying Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown Then close the scanner lid a EN ne Your machine begins scanning the back side KA If you do not press the button only the front side will be copied If the original is larger than the printable area some portions may not be printed 4 Copying 106 5 Scan amp Send Scanning Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer Understanding the Scan amp Send screen Basic scan Scanning with TWAIN enabled software Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Mac scanning Linux scanning j Understanding the Scan amp Send screen This section describes all scanning and fax functions When you tap Scan amp Send from the home screen or Apps the Scan amp Send screen appears This screen has 2 tabs and many options All options are grouped by feature so that you can configure the job easily If want to go home tap the home filia button KA Click the 7 Help from the home screen or quick menu and then click on any option you want to know about A Send More To Add Destination Me BA Original Email Fax SMB FTP Box Duplex Scan Options File Name File Format Resolution Quality OCR Language Command keys Description
229. nent Do not change it by yourself There is a risk of an explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type Dispose used batteries according to e For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt the instructions Devices and Printers For Windows 8 search for Devices and Printers 3 Right click your machine 4 For Windows XP 2003 2008 Vista press Properties For Windows 7 Windows 8 and Windows Server 2008 R2 from context menus select the Printer properties 10 Supplies and Accessories Installing accessories LS is ul an LS If Printer properties item has B mark you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer Select Device Options The Properties window may differ depending on the driver or operating system you are using Select the appropriate option Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models if so it is not applicable to your machine e Tray Options Select the optional tray you installed You can select the tray Storage Options Select the optional memory you installed If this feature is checked you can select the Print Mode Printer Configuration Select the printer language for the print job e Administrator Settings You can select the Printer Status and EMF Spooling 7 Admin Job Accounting Allows you to associate user and account identification information with each document you print
230. networked computer and type the IP address of your machine see Settings tab on page 162 MAC Filtering Disable MAC filtering IPv4 Filtering Disable IPv4 filtering IPv6 Filtering Disable IPv6 filtering 3 Network Setup 311 Installing driver over the network You must install the printer driver software for printing The software includes Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed All applications should be closed on your computer before beginning installation 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on Also your machine s IP address should have been set 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive rm If the installation window does not appear click Start gt All programs gt Accessories gt Run X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive and click OK For Windows 8 If the installation window does not appear from Charms select Search gt Apps and search for Run Type in X Setup exe replacing X with the letter that represents your CD ROM drive and click OK If Tap to choose what happens with this disc pop up window appears click the window and select Run Setup exe 3 Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation window Then click Next 3 Network Setup ga Installing driver over the network Select Network on the Printer Connection Type screen The
231. ng com latin_en support SUDAN 1969 www samsung com English support TURKEY 4447711 www samsung com SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 SAMSUNG www samsung com tr support se support TUNISIA 80 1000 12 www samsung com 0800 726 78 64 0800 SAMSUNG www samsung com n_africa support ch support German SWITZERLAND 800 SAMSUNG 800 726 7864 www samsung com www samsung com ae support English ch fr support French U A E www samsung com 18252273 www samsung com ae_ar support Arabic SYRIA levant support English UK 0330 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com uk support 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com DED support U S A 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com C us support AN 0800 329999 www samsung com D bag Electonics tw support Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 364 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center WebSite U S A Mobile Phones 1 800 SAMSUNG 72 6786 HHP 1 888 987 HELP 4357 www samsung com us support UGANDA 0800 300 300 www samsung com support UKRAINE 0 800 502 000 www samsung com ua support Ukrainian www samsung com ua_ru support Russian URUGUAY 000 405 437 33 www samsung com latin support Spanish www samsung com latin_en support English UZBEKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com support VENEZUELA 0 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com ve support VIETNAM 1800 588 889 www samsung
232. nsert the USB Drive device to other ports except the ports which is Printing from a USB Drive device as shown below the image If you insert the USB Drive device to other ports h hi h i he displ IG Mise Hines Hawa Walling Mesag Ole CisPlay sereen You can directly print files stored on a USB Drive device You can print TIFF JPEG and PRN files USB print option supported file types PRN Only files created by provided driver with your machine are compatible PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when you print a document The document will be saved as a PRN file rather than printed on paper Only PRN files created in this fashion can be printed directly from USB Drive device see Printing to a file PRN on page 86 TIFF TIFF 6 0 Baseline JPEG JPEG Baseline PDF PDF 1 7 and below A Do not remove the USB Drive device while it is in use The machine warranty CORSE ECOVEr Gamage ausad Dy AINSEFE MIRUSE 9 In case of 8bit CMYK JPEG files Job could be cancelled e If your USB Drive device has certain features such as security settings and a password settings your machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see USB Drive device s User s Guide To print a document from a USB Drive device 10 Supplies and Accessories ga Using a USB Drive device 1 Insert a USB Drive device into the USB port on your machine 5 Select the appropriate option Your machine automatica
233. nternet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for You need one of the following web browsers to use SyncThru Web Service y SyncThru Web Service Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher e Some menus may not appear on the display screen depending on the l settings or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Chrome 4 0 or higher FireFox 3 0 or higher Safari 3 0 or higher What is SyncThru Web Service Connecting to SyncThru Web Service If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP IP network parameters correctly you can manage the machine via SyncThru Web Service Use SyncThru Web Service to IPv4 supported web browser View the machine s device information and check its current status Change TCP IP parameters and set up other network parameters 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv4 addressing as a URL Change the printer preference Enter the machine s IP address http xxx xxx Xxx xxx in the address Set the email notifications advising of the machine s status field and press the Enter key or click Go Get support for using the machine Upgrade machine software L Youcan get the machine s IP address from the machine report see Report on page 295 2 Your machine s SyncThru Web Service website opens 8 Management Tools 159 SyncThru Web Service IPv6 supported web browser 1 Start a web brow
234. nting System CUPS You can print on your machine from any such application 1 Open the document to print Open the File menu and click Page Setup Print Setup for 2 someapplications 3 Choose your paper size orientation and makesure that your machine is selected Click Apply Open the File menu and click Print Select your machine to print Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print Change other printing options in each tab if necessary Click Print O N QAU A K Automatic manual duplex printing may not be available depending on models You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other applications for odd even printing see Features by model on page 8 Printing files You can print text image pdf files on your machine using the standardCUPS directly from the command line interface The CUPS Ip or Ipr utility allows you to do that You can print these files by using below command format Ip d lt printer name gt o lt option gt lt file name gt Please refer to Ip or lpr man page on your system for more details Configuring Printer Properties You can change the default printing options or connection type with Printing utility supplied by o s 1 Launch Printing utility Go to System gt Administration gt Printing menu or execute system config printer command in Terminal program 2 Select your printer and double click it 3 Printing 8o Linux printing
235. nuxa Kopea RFID Rad IO Freq uency Interface Device Vimnoptep OOO Camcyxr SnekTpoxuKe Pyc KomnaHn Anpec 125009 r Mocxsa yn Bos nawxeHra 10 CamcyHr InextpoHurc Ko NTA RFID operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not MaTat aokr 129 Camcynr po Exrrour ry Cyaok K Kenru no Koper PecnyGnukacei f i f CAMCYHI 3NEKTPOHUKC K3 HA LIEHTPAN SKA KWC cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including 3angpi MeKeH Kaibi KasaKctah PecnyGnuxacsi AnMaTel K On Oapabu Aaneinel 36 3 4 xa6atTap interference that may cause undesired operation of the device U S A France Taiwan only 11 Appendix 261 Regulatory information Germany only Das Ger t ist nicht f r die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gem BildscharbV vorgesehen Turkey only ROHS EEE Y netmeli ine Uygundur This EEE is compliant with RoHS e Bu r n n ortalama ya am s resi 7 y l garanti suresi 2 yildir Thailand only This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement Canada only This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications Le present materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d Industrie Canada The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination of an interface may consist of any comb
236. o hundreds of printers and also supports access control authentication and encryption making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones IPX SPX The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications Its main tasks include standardization allocation of the radio spectrum and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls A T out of ITU T indicates telecommunication ITU T No 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU T for document facsimile transmissions JBIG IPX SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange Sequenced Packet Exchange It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP IP with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP and SPX having similarities to TCP IPX SPX was primarily designed for local area networks LANs and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose typically its performance exceeds that of TCP IP on a LAN ISO The International Organization for Standardization ISO is an international standard setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies It produces world wide industrial and commercial standards Joint Bi level Image Experts Group JBIG is an image compression standard with no lo
237. o the following When you print with a Mac you need to check the printer driver settings in each application you use Follow the steps below to print from a Mac J Open the document to print Printing multiple pages on one sheet 2 Open the File menu and click Page Setup Document Setup in some You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper This feature applications provides a cost effective way to print draft copies 3 Choose your paper size orientation scaling other options and make O lication lect Print f he Fil sure that your machine is selected Click OK 1 penan application and sclect Prine irom tne kilemens 2 Select Layout from the drop down list under Orientation In the Pages per Sheet drop down list select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper 4 Open the File menu and click Print 5 Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print 6 Click Print 3 Select the other options to use 4 Click Print The machine prints the selected number of pages to print on one sheet of paper 3 Printing Mac printing Printing on both sides of the paper KU Some features may not be available depending on models or options It means that the features are not supported see Variety feature on page 10 Before printing in the duplex mode decide on which edge you will be binding your finished document The binding options are as follows Long Edge Binding
238. o type in the field Tap Done to save the information Storing address groups Tap Address book on the home screen or Apps gt Groups gt F add on the display screen Tap the Name input field and enter a name for the group Tap Add contact and check the boxes for any addresses you want include in the group Tap Done when you are finished To search for a contact tap the search field in the Add contact screen Enter the first few letters of a contact s name or tap the Q search icon to show all contacts In the list that appears check the boxes for the contacts you want to add and tap Done Tap Done to save the information 7 Setting up an Address Book 146 Using the control panel Editing address groups Searching for address book entries 1 Tap Address book gt Groups on the home screen or Apps You can search the addresses that are currently stored in the address book 2 Tap the name of group you want to edit and tap Bi edi 1 Tap Address book gt Contacts or Groups on the home screen or Apps Tap the Q search input field and enter a name or part of a name to If you want to delete an address group check the box for the gro ou 2 ol ee i ONP search for want to delete and tap delete 3 The machine then displays the search results Tap the group name input field to change the name of the group 3 4 Tap Add contact and check the boxes for any addresses you want Deleting address book
239. odels If so it is not applicable to your machine IPv6 Address You can set the IPv6 address types Click the 7 Help from the home screen or quick menu and DHCPv6 Configuration You can set the DHCPv6 configuration then click on any option you want to know about DHCP Unique Identifier Show the DHCP Unique Identifiier 802 1x You can enable disable 802 1x Security Tap Settings gt Network Settings from the home screen or Apps 802 1x Authentication Method You can select the authentication algorithm to use DHCPv6 Identity Association Show the DHCP Identity Association Feature Description TCP IPv4 Eth P i thernet Port You can enable disable ethernet port You can set IPv4 settings Ethernet Speed You can select the speed rate of ethernet p o IP Setting You can choose the method for allocating IP addresses MAC Address Shows the Mac address of the machine Static Select to enter IP address Subnet Mask Gateway Address manually IP Setting You can set the TCP IPv4 IP setting BOOTP IP address Subnet Mask Gateway Address are automatically allocated by the BOOTP Server DNS Configuration You can set the DNS setting DHCP IP address Subnet Mask Gateway Address are automatically WINS Y fi he WIN i a aa a allocated by the DHCP Server Display IP Address You can set the machine to display the IP address on the Home screen 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu Network Settings D
240. ogs You can use the options in this menu to make the copies easier to read Background Density Allows you to adjust the density of the background in the scanned image This feature is useful when scanning originals that have turned yellow from age or originals with a dark background Backside Image Allows you to erase any text or images that show through from the other side of the original You can use this feature to ensure that your scanned output is clearly legible A Mirror Image This option allows you to reverse the original document like a mirror 4 Copying 102 Basic copying This is the usual procedure to copy your original documents 1 Tap Copy from the home screen or Apps 2 Place the originals face up in the DSDF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DSDF see Loading originals on page 45 3 Adjust the settings on the Copy tab and More tab 4 Enter the number of copies desired on the numeric keypad or button on the control panel if necessary 5 O Start from the control panel to begin ba 2 To cancel the current copy job tap KI Stop gt tap Job Status on the control panel Then delete the job you want see Job Status on page 34 4 Copying 103 Quick copying The Quick Copy menu allows you to quickly set common copy options without having to open a lower level menu or another tab However this menu does not offer every copy option available
241. ols Using Samsung Printer Status The Samsung Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine status Icon Mean Description a Normal The machine is in ready mode and experiencing no TheSamsung Printer Status window and its contents shown in this user s SIrOrS ene 4 guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use o Warning The machine is in a state where an error might e Check the operating system s that are compatible with your machine occur in the future For example it might be in see System requirements on page 253 toner low status which may lead to toner empty Available for Windows OS users only status Error The machine has at least one error Samsung Printer Status overview If an error occurs while operating you can check the error from the Samsung Printer Status Samsung Printer Status is installed automatically when you install 1 the machine software User s Guide You can also launch Samsung Printer Status manually Go to the Printing Preferences click the Basic tab gt Printer Status button These icons appear on the Windows task bar 2 Supplies Information 3 Option 4 Order Supplies 5 Cancel Print 8 Management Tools Using Samsung Printer Status User s Guide You can view the online User s Guide K This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs You can directly open the troubleshoo
242. om the SyncThru Web Service select the Security tab gt Network Security Interface Security The Interface Security menu sets the basic policy for connected interfaces Only Print is enabled by default For example if Scan is not enabled then you cannot scan from a device connected via Wi Fi You must select Scan or All Protocols in the menu to enable scanning Digital Certificate You can manage digital certificates A digital certificate is an electronic certificate that verifies the secure association between communication nodes You need to add the certificate for SSL communication This feature is also available from the machine see Network Security on page 300 Secure Connection You can enable or disable secure connection to use more enhanced secure network channel For secure communication using the Secure Connection feature is recommended SNMPv3 You can set SNMPv3 IP Security You can set IP security settings 802 1x Ethernet You can enable disable 802 1x Security as well as manage filtering rules This feature is also available from the machine see 802 1x on page 299 8 Management Tools ga i SyncThru Web Service IP MAC Filtering You can set filtering options for IP and MAC addresses If the administrator does not add a filtering rule for IPv4 IPv6 and MAC addresses nothing is filtered If the administrator has added a filtering rule filtering will be applied to the entered IPv4 IPv6 and MA
243. ommunications facilities or require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment or otherwise materially affect its use or performance the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service Ringer Equivalence Number The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line and is useful for determining whether you have overloaded the line Installing several s of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls especially ringing when your line is called The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company In some cases a sum of five may not be usable on your line If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly you should immediately remove it from your telephone line as it may cause harm to the telephone network The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in th
244. on device before tagging LS 6 The printer starts scanning the content The scanned data is saved on your mobile device KA If you want to continue scanning follow the instruction on the app screen 3 Network Setup 336 Using the NFC feature Optional Tag your mobile device usually located on the back of the mobile device over the NFC tag nec on your printer Wait few seconds for the mobile device to send a job to the printer A For some mobile devices NFC tag might not be located at the back of the mobile device Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile device before tagging 6 The printer starts faxing the content 3 Network Setup Supported Mobile Apps Samsung Mobile Print Samsung Mobile Print is a free application that To download apps go to the application store Play Store App Store on your enables users to print scan Only users with the machine supports scan or mobile device and just search for Samsung Mobile Print Samsung Mobile fax Only users with the machine supports fax photos documents andweb Print Pro Samusng Mobile Print Manager You can also visit iTunes for Apple pages directly from your smartphone or tablet Samsung Mobile Print is devices on your computer not only compatible with your Android and iOS smart phones but also with your iPod Touch and tablet PC It connects your mobile device to a network Samsung Mobile Print connected Samsung prin
245. on For example Samsung Mobile printer to print from your smartphone Check whether firewall software V3 or Norton is blocking the communication If the computer and the machine are connected on the same network and it cannot be found when searching firewall software might be blocking the communication Refer to the user s guide for the software to turn it off and try searching for the machine again KU e When you have found the printer you want to connect to from your mobile device select the printer and the printer s LED will blink Press the WPS button on the printer and it will be connected to your mobile device If your mobile device does not support Wi Fi Direct you need to enter Check whether the machine s IP address is allocated correctly You can the Network Key of a printer instead of pushing the WPS button check the IP address by printing the network configuration report 3 Network Setup gg Wireless network setup Optional Check whether the access point or wireless router has a configured security password If it has a password refer to the access point or wireless router administrator Check the machine s IP address Reinstall the machine driver and change the settings to connect to the machine on the network Due to the characteristics of DHCP the allocated IP address could change if the machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been reset Register the product s MAC addr
246. on and size of the file To use the Box feature tap Box from the home screen or Apps Storage allows you to store the scanned data on HDD your machine s hard disk drive in your machine The stored data can be sent to different destinations like Fax Email Server Box or USB Using multi check 2 This function is not available in Print and Send storage Touch and hold a folder or file then change the multi check mode 9 This function is not available in Download and USB storage Public All users can access to the files Private Set up the password to prevent unauthorized person from accessing 1 Select the type of Storage Print or Send in which you want to create the folder 2 Tap aim 5 Create folder 3 Input the folder name and select Set as Private and then tap OK 4 the appropriate information in the ID Password Confirm Password fields and then tap OK 8 Management Tools 183 9 Troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error Redistributing toner 185 Replacing the toner cartridge 187 Replacing the imaging unit 189 Tips for avoiding paper jams 191 Clearing jams 192 Understanding display messages 208 Power and cable connecting problems 213 Solving other problems 214 a If you cannot solve problems using this chapter contact your administrator or service center You can see the contact information from Settings 5 System 5 Contact Information
247. on your document Off Disables this feature New Create a new page overlay containing your logo or image Overlap Select an overlap location Erase Edge You can copy the original without any edges or margins Off Disables this feature Border Erase Erase an equal amount of edges from all copies Hole Punch Erase Erase hole punch marks from the left edge of copies Image Shift To prevent images from overlapping with punch holes staples and other marks you can move an image s position Off Disables this feature Auto Center Automatically position at the center of the paper Custom Shift Adjust the margins of the paper as needed Covers The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken from a different tray Covers must be the same size and orientation as the main body of the job Off Disables this feature Front Print the document with a front cover Back Print the document with a back cover Front amp Back Prints the document with a front and back cover Cover Sheet Sets the option for double sided copying Paper Source Selects the default paper tray to use Image Adjustment This option allows you to manually adjust the image Darkness Sharpness Contrast and Negative Image 4 Copying 101 Understanding the copy screen Background Adjustment This option allows you to compensate for originals that contain color in the background such as newspapers or catal
248. only This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Software on page 8 Capture your screen and launch Easy Capture Manager by simply pressing the Print Screen key on the keyboard Now you can easily print your captured screen as captured or edited 8 Management Tools 166 Samsung AnyWeb Print 2 e Available for Windows OS users only This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Software on page 8 This tool helps you screen capture preview scrap and print Windows Internet Explorer pages more easily than when you use an ordinary program Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads 8 Management Tools j Easy Eco Driver KA Available for Windows OS users only see Software on page 8 With the Easy Eco Driver you can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing Easy Eco Driver also allows you simple editing such as removing images and texts and more You can save frequently used settings as a preset How to use Open a document to print Open printing preference window see Opening printing preferences on page 66 From the Favorites tab select Eco Printing Preview Click OK 5 Print in the window A preview window appears uu A W N Select the options you want to apply to the document You can see the preview of the a
249. ontacts marked as favorites in the address book Groups Lists the groups registered in the address book and the users registered to those groups 7 Setting up an Address Book 143 Understanding the address screen Command keys 2 You cannot add a group as a member of another group in on page 280 K To use some features you may need to log in as an administrator see Log Button Name Description Quick Menu Show the quick menu Q Search Search for a desired address g Add Add a contact favorite or group Edit Select the address you want to edit and tap this Kal button My Program Shows list of added programs Sub menu Open the sub menu id Action overflow A Sub menu Action overflow To use some features you may need to log in as an administrator see Log in on page 280 Search Searches the names and contact information in the Contacts list Delete Contacts Delete the contacts you set Import You can import the address book saved from another MFP or same MFP Export You can export the address book saved from another MFP or same MFP 7 Setting up an Address Book 144 Using the control panel 6 Tap the SMB or FTP input boxes to enter that information of the Storing individual addresses recipient Tap Address book on the home screen or Apps Tap F add on the Ifyou wanta SMB or FTP server to allow anonymous connections select displ
250. option you want to know about 8 Management Tools 169 Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager e Available for Windows and Mac OS users only 2 The screenshot may differ depending on operating system you are using e For Windows Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for Samsung Easy Printer Manager a Samsung Easy Printer Manager samang Easy Printer Manager Samsung Easy Printer Manager is an application that combines Samsung machine settings into one location Samsung Easy Printer Manager combines device settings as well as printing environments settings actions and launching All of these features provide a gateway to conveniently use your Samsung machine Samsung Easy Printer Manager provides two different user interfaces for the user to choose from the basic user interface and the advanced user interface Switching between the two interfaces is easy just click a button Supplies Toner Toner ID Understanding Samsung Easy Printer Manager i To open the program For Windows a Select Start gt Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt Samsung Easy Printer Manager gt Samsung Easy Printer Manager Printer list The Printer List displays printers installed on your computer and network printers added by network discovery Windows For Mac 1 aniy Open the Applications folder gt Samsung folder gt Samsung Easy Printer Manager The Samsung Easy Printer Mana
251. options 2 Sided Calendar For originals that are printed on both sides but the back is rotated 180 degrees You can set a detail options in the Send tab and More tab KA To use 2 Sided Book and 2 Sided Calendar load the originals on the DSDF If the machine cannot detect the original on the DSDF it Send 5 akin Sub menu action overflow gt UI Configuration automatically changes to 1 Sided e e You can customize the UI of each tab using UI configuration option Some menus are disabled If so it is not available to your machine 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 112 Understanding the Scan 4 Send screen Scan Options Ultra Fine Recommended for originals containing extremely fine details This option is only available if the receiving machine also Set file options of the scanned output supports Ultra Fine resolution File Name Enter a file name to store the scan file name at destination File Format Select a file format for the scanned output Book Scan PDF Options Set PDF file options for the scanned out Use this feature to scan a book If the book is too thick lift the DSDF until its hinges are engaged by the stopper then close the DSDF If the book or Resolution Adjust the document resolution The higher this value the magazine is thicker than 30 mm 1 18 inches start copying with the DSDF open clearer the result but scan time may take longer Quality Use this option to produce a high quality documen
252. or XXX XXX XXX XXX shared_ printer in where computer_name share d_printer or XXX XXX XXX XXX shared_ printer means the network path to the printer by entering two slashes the computer name or local IP address of the PC sharing the printer and then the share name of the printer 3 Network Setup 314 Installing driver over the network Command line a dest paths or A cdest paths Definition Specifies destination path for installation E The destination path should be a fully qualified path Description Since machine drivers should be installed on the OS specific location this command applies to only application software Command line 1x or X Definition Uses existing machine driver files to create printer instance if it is already installed Description This command provides a way to install a printer instance that uses installed printer driver files without installing an additional driver n Printer name gt or N Printer Specifies printer name Printer instance shall be With this parameter you can add printer instances as your up lt printer name gt or UP lt printer name gt Removes only specified printer instance and not the driver files This command provides a way to remove only specified printer instance from your system without effecting other printer drivers It will name gt created as specified w
253. ormity A full declaration defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co Ltd representative EC Certification Certification to 1999 5 EC Radio Equipment amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive FAX This Samsung product has been self certified by Samsung for pan European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network PSTN in accordance with Directive 1999 5 EC The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European countries In the event of problems you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd in the first instance The product has been tested against TBR21 To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard the European Telecommunication Standards Institute ETSI has issued an advisory document EG 201 121 which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals The product has been designed against and is fully compliant with all of the relevant advisory notes contained in this document 11 Appendix 265 Regulatory information European radio approval information for products fitted with EU approved radio devices Low power Radio LAN type devices radio frequency RF wireless communication devices operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz band may be present embedd
254. ors print incorrectly 2 Refer to the Mac User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac error messages 9 Troubleshooting 229 i Solving other problems Common Linux problems Condition There is no xsane nor simple scan application on my Linux machine Suggested solutions For some Linux distributions there might be no default scan application To use scan features install one of scan applications using download center supplied by the OS ex Ubuntu Software Center for Ubuntu Install Remove Software for openSUSE Software for Fedora Scanner can not be found via network For some Linux distributions strong firewall is enabled and it may block our installer from opening the necessary port for searching network devices In such a case open the snmp port 22161 manually or disable the firewall temporarily while using the device When printing more than one copy the second copy does not print The problem occurs on Ubuntu 12 04 due to the problem in standard CUPS filter pdftops Update cups filters package to version 1 0 18 to fix the problem pdftops is a part of cups filters package Unchecking the collate option in the Print Dialog does not work For some distributions GNOME Print Dialog has an issue handling the collate option As workaround set the default value of collate option to False using the system s printing utility execute system config printer in the
255. ot meet these specifications may cause problems or require repairs Such repairs are not covered by Samsung s Poor print quality warranty or service agreements e Increased paper jams e The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type used see Print media specifications on page 249 e Premature wear on the machine eke i e Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine It could Properties such as weight composition grain and moisture content are cause damage to the machine important factors that affect the machine s performance and the output quality e Using flammable print media can cause a fire When you choose print materials consider the following e Use designated print media see Print media specifications on page e The type size and weight of the print media for your machine are described 242 in print media specifications see Print media specifications on page 249 e Desired outcome The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project A The use of flammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may lead to overheating of the unit and in rare cases may cause a fire Brightness Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper more vibrant images The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type used Surface smoothness The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp i j ai see Print me
256. otal All Tap and select Send Usage Shows the count of Send Email SMB FTP USB PC Others jobs Fax Send Usage PSTN Shows the count of Fax Send Usage User Usage Login user only Each category shows the printing usage by user 1 Introduction O Display screen and useful menu KA To use User Usage you may need to select to Application Authentication and Stanard Accounting Only from Settings 5 Admin Settings 5 Security gt Mode or Method on the home screen or Apps To use the USB feature tap Box 5 USB on the home screen or Apps To use this feature you need to insert a USB Drive device into the USB port on your machine Help provides online information to help with your machine questions The Help app provides information about the menus and functions available in the machine Use the pane on the left side of the screen to navigate the Help app You can also select the headings below each section to browse the help topics Tap Help from the home screen or Apps 1 The Help screen is displayed Select a topic and follow the built in navigation N J Click the v Help from the home screen or quick menu and then click on any option you want to know about My Page The My Page app allows you to easily change your profile information and settings Your My Page profile stores your contact information as well as your personal settings You can use these settings to perso
257. our printer from the list 8 Management Tools Using Samsung Printer Experience Cancelling a print job Basic tab If the printing job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler cancel the job as follows Samsung Printer Experience You can access this window by simply double clicking the machine icon ca in the Windows task bar You can also cancel the current job by pressing amp Stop button on the control panel Opening more settings The screen may appear somewhat different depending on the model or options Basic This option allows you to choose the basic printing settings such as copies orientation and document type You can set up more printing parameters Eco settings Open the document you want to print This option allows you to choose multiple pages per side to save media From the Charms select Devices 1 2 3 Select your printer from the list 4 Click More settings 8 Management Tools Using Samsung Printer Experience Advanced tab Security tab Samsung Printer Experience 10 Some features may not be available depending on the model or options If this tab is not shown or disabled it means that this features are not Advanced su pported Samsung Printer Experience Security Paper settings This option allows you to set the basic paper handling specifications Layout settings This option allows you to set the various ways to layout your
258. ove the scan quality by selecting the document type on page 280 for the current scan job 1 Sided For originals that are printed on one side only 2 Sided Book For originals that are printed on both sides Setting options 2 Sided Calendar For originals that are printed on both sides but the back is rotated 180 degrees You can set a detail options in the Send tab and More tab KA To use 2 Sided Book and 2 Sided Calendar load the originals on the DSDF If the machine cannot detect the original on the DSDF it Send 5 akin Sub menu action overflow gt UI Configuration automatically changes to 1 Sided e e You can customize the UI of each tab using UI configuration option Some menus are disabled If so it is not available to your machine 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 130 Understanding the fax screen Scan Options Ultra Fine Recommended for originals containing extremely fine details This option is only available if the receiving machine also Set file options of the scanned output supports Ultra Fine resolution File Name Enter a file name to store the scan file name at destination File Format Select a file format for the scanned output Book Scan Resolution Adjust the document resolution The higher this value the Use this feature to scan a book If the book is too thick lift the DSDF until its clearer the result but scan time may take longer hinges are engaged by the stopper then close the DSDF If
259. ow the instruction on the display screen The messages are displayed on the display screen Connecting in PIN mode 1 2 Tap Settings gt Network Settings gt Wi Fi from the home screen or App Type in the ID and Password Use the same login ID Password Domain as when logging in from the machine see Log in on page 280 If you want to create a new user or change the password see Security tab on page 163 Tap WPS Settings 5 Connect via PIN The eight digit PIN appears on the display You need to enter the eight digit PIN within two minutes on the computer that is connected to the access point or wireless router Follow the instruction on the display screen The messages are displayed on the display screen 3 Network Setup ga Wireless network setup Optional Using the Wi Fi Networks Before starting you will need to know the network name SSID of your wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted This information was set when the access point or wireless router was installed If you do not know about your wireless environment please ask the person who set up your network 1 Tap Settings gt Network Settings gt Wi Fi from the home screen or App 2 The machine will display a list of available networks from which to choose Mfter a network is chosen then printer will prompt for the corresponding security key 3 Select the Wi Fi network option you want Using a network cable See
260. pecial print features 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 66 Printing booklets Click the Basic tab select Poster Printing in the Type drop down list 2 g a eee This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the 3 Select the page layout you want pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet 4 Select the Poster Overlap value Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to make it easier to paste the sheets together 410 mm Egle ib ale blk To change the print settings from your software application access the Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 66 Click the Basic tab select Booklet Printing from the Type drop down N Click the Paper tab select the Original size Source and Type Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together la B W list Click the Advanced button Then select the option you want Click the Paper tab select the Original size Source and Type The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes In order to find out the available paper size for this feature select the available paper size in the Original size option on the Paper tab If you
261. ped image format TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners TIFF images make use of tags keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file This flexible and platform independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains toner Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers which forms the text and images on the printed paper Toner can be fused by by a combination of heat pressure from the fuser causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper Glossary Glossary TWAIN Watermark An industry standard for scanners and software By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with a TWAIN compliant program a scan can be initiated from within the program It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention UNC is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products The format of a UNC path is lt servername gt lt sharename gt lt Additional directory gt URL Uniform Resource Locator URL is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located USB Unive
262. per in the tray e Check to see if the display shows any error message If it does clear the problem e Find the optimal line for communication To check that see Smart Fax Diagnostics menu see General fax settings on page 139 The machine does not send e Make sure that the original is loaded in the document feeder or on the scanner glass e Check the fax machine you are sending to to see if it can receive your fax e Find the optimal line for communication To check that see Smart Fax Diagnostics menu see General fax settings on page 139 The incoming fax has blank spaces or is of poor quality e The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty e A noisy phone line can cause line errors e Check your machine by making a copy e Atoner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life Replace the toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 187 e Find the optimal line for communication To check that see Smart Fax Diagnostics menu see General fax settings on page 139 9 Troubleshooting 226 i Solving other problems Condition Suggested solutions Some of the words on an The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam incoming fax are stretched There are lines on the originals Check your scan unit for marks and clean it see Cleaning the scan unit on page 353 you sent The machine dials a number The other fax machine may be turned off out of pape
263. permission to the To verify removal results execute the install c command installer script Execute the install c command to verify installation results To re install it use the command install i to reinstall the binaries 3 Network Setup 318 Installing driver over the network Setting up the printer To add the printer to your UNIX system run installprinter from the command 12 line This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window Setup the printer in this window according to the following steps 1 2 Ul 8 9 Type the name of the printer Select the appropriate printer model from the model list Enter any description corresponding to the type of the printer in the Type field This is optional Specify any printer description in the Description field This is optional Specify the printer location in the Location field Type the IP address or DNS name of the printer in the Device textbox for network connected printers On IBM AIX with jetdirect Queue type only the DNS name is possible numeric IP address is not allowed Queue type shows the connection as Ipd or jetdirect in the corresponding list box Additionally usb type is available on Sun Solaris OS Select Copies to set the number of copies Check the Collate option to receive copies already sorted 10 Check the Reverse Order option to receive copies in the reverse order Click OK to add the printer 11 Check the
264. pose tray 1 Open the multi purpose tray and open the extension if necessary TA LE S st Squeeze the multi purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them to the width of the paper Do not force too much otherwise the paper will bend resulting in a paper jam or skew Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading originals 2 Media and Tray 53 j Loading paper in the tray 5 When you print a document set the paper type and size for the multi purpose tray See Setting the paper size and type on page 59 2 Media and Tray 54 Printing on special media The table below shows the available special media for each tray The paper setting in the machine and driver should match to print without a paper mismatch error To change the paper setting set in the machine from SyncThru Web Service click Settings tab gt Machine Settings gt System gt Input Tray see Settings tab on page 162 Or you can set it from the control panel Then set the paper type from the Printing preferences window gt Paper tab gt Paper Type see Opening printing preferences on page 66 For example if you want to print on labels select Labels for Paper Type When using special media we recommend you feed a piece of paper at a time Check the maximum input number of media for each tray see Print media specifications on page 249 Types Tray 1 Optional tra
265. pplied features 6 Click Print If you want to run Easy Eco Driver every time you print check Start Easy Eco Driver before printing job checkbox in the Basic tab of the printing preference window 8 Management Tools 168 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan compile and save documents in multiple formats including epub format These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax Whether you re a student needing to organize research from the library or a stay at home mom sharing scanned pictures from last year s birthday party Samsung Easy Document Creator will provide you with the necessary tools The Samsung Easy Document Creator provides features mentioned below Image Scanning Use for scanning single or multiple pictures Document Scanning Use for scanning documents with text or text and images Text Converting Use for scanning documents that need to be saved in an editable text format Book Scanning Use for scanning books with the flatbed scanner SNS Upload Provides an easy and quick way to upload scanned image or existing images to a variety of social networking sites SNS E Book Conversion Provides the ability to scan multiple documents asone E Book or convert existing files into an E Book format Plug in Scan and fax directly from the Microsoft Office program 2 Click the Help 7 button from the window and then click on any
266. ption allows you to set the actual paper size of the sides of the paper on page 76 originals Output Size This option allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the originals size see Fitting your document to a Paper tab selected paper size on page 77 Percentage This option allows you to change the size of a page s Use the Paper tab options to set the basic paper handling specifications contents to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing ina percentage you want see Change the size by percentage of your document on page 77 Copies Source Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray Use MP Tray when printing on special materials such as envelopes and This option allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed You can transparencies select 1 to 9999 copies Type This option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray This will let you get the best quality printout If not the desired print quality may not be achieved Specical Page This option is allows you to make special pages such as covers You can add delete or update the special page settings to the list This option is available only when you use the PCL printer driver 3 Printing 68 Opening printing preferences Graphics tab Use the Graphic tab options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs Quality The higher the se
267. ption changes the current copy settings to the original copy settings configured at the factory Tap the Restore Default option in this menu to restore the default settings Copy Settings The Another Page Confirmation option specifies whether the machine requires you to confirm that the scanning is complete after each page Select this option to efficiently copy multiple pages in a single copy job 4 Copying 96 Understanding the copy screen Setting options KA Another Page Confirmation This option specifies whether the machine requires you to confirm that the scanning is complete after each page Select this option to efficiently copy multiple pages in a single copy job The Copy tab provides two sections The More tab provides additional sections KI e You can customize the UI of each tab using UI configuration option UI Configuration Allows you to select the options that appear in the Copy menu Tap the or symbol on the menu icons to add or remove menus You can also tap and hold a menu icon to move it to a different position or Some menus are disabled If so it is not available to your machine tap Clear All to remove all the menus Send 5 ki Sub menu action overflow gt UI Configuration w Help app explains the normal and usual procedure for copying originals Click the W Help from the home screen or H quick menu and then click on any option you want to know about Job progress
268. pying Understanding the copy screen When you tap Copy from the home screen or Apps the Copy screen appears This screen has several tabs and many copying options All the options are grouped by feature so you can configure your selections easily If want to go home tap the home ii button KA Click the pm Help from the home screen or quick menu and then click on any option you want to know about Command keys Virtual Hard Key The positon of virtual hard keys is fixed on the right side of screen When an app is launched the virtual hard keys are shown If the screen is touched the virtual hard keys always appear If the gt touched the virtual hard keys are hidden and shown Button Name Description H Quick Menu Open the quick menus Cy Search Search for a desired menu or app My Program Add an app to my program list Sub menu Open the sub menu baki Action overflow E Set the number of copies printed Button Name Description B Reset Reset the current machine s configuration Shi Interrupt Suspend the current job allowing for urgent copying aw Stop Stop a job at any time A popup window appears to amp show the jobs that you can stop O Start Start a job 4 Copying 94 Understanding the copy screen Button Name Description Copy tab Preview for Shows the job preview status T Preview for Scans for job 4 play MD H a D
269. r FS see Opening printing preferences on page 66 An unknown Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1 000 m image 3 281 ft or above The high altitude may affect the print repetitively quality such as loose toner or light imaging Change the appears ona few sheets or loose toner light print or contamination occurs correct altitude setting to your machine 9 Troubleshooting 222 i Solving other problems Copying problems Condition Copies are too light or too dark Suggested solution Tap Copy from the home screen or Apps You can adjust the darkness level of a copy if needed for easier reading if the original contains faint markings or dark images see Changing Darkness on page 95 Smears lines marks or spots appear on copies e If the defects are on the original tap Copy from the home screen or Apps see Changing Darkness on page 95 e If there are no defects on the original clean the scan unit Cleaning the scan unit or contact a service representative Copy image is skewed e Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DSDF e Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly e Ifthe problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Blank copies print out Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DSDF Image rubs off the copy easily e Replace the paper in the
270. r or cannot answer incoming calls Speak with the other machine operator and but the connection with the ask them to solve the problem on their side other fax machine fails There may not be enough memory space to store the fax If the display indicating the memory status shows delete any faxes you no longer need from the memory and then try to store the fax again Call for service Faxes do not store in memory Blank areas appear at the You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting Check the paper size and type again bottom of each page or on other pages with a small strip of text at the top Operating system problems Common Windows problems Condition Suggested solutions File in Use message appears Exit all software applications Remove all software from the startup group then restart Windows Reinstall the printer driver 9 Troubleshooting during installation i Solving other problems Condition Suggested solutions General Protection Fault Close all other applications reboot Windows and try printing again Exception OE Spool 32 or Illegal Operation messages appear Fail To Print A printer These messages may appear during printing Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing If the message appears in timeout error occurred ready mode or after printing has completed check the connection and or whether an error has
271. r performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure This machine s power reception device is the power cord To switch off the power supply remove the power cord from the electrical outlet Installation Moving A Warning Do not place the machine in an area with dust humidity or water leaks This could result in electric shock or fire A Caution Before moving the machine turn the power off and disconnect all cords The information below are only suggestions based on the units weight If you have a medical condition that prevents you from lifting do not lift the machine Ask for help and always use the appropriate amount of people to lift the device safety Then lift the machine e Ifthe machine weighs under 20 kg 44 09 Ibs lift with 1 person e Ifthe machine weighs 20 kg 44 09 Ibs 40kg 88 18 Ibs lift with 2 people e Ifthe machine weighs more than 40 kg 88 18 Ibs lift with 4 or more people The machine could fall causing injury or machine damage Choose a flat surface with enough space for ventilation to place the machine Also consider the space required to open the cover and trays The place should be well ventilated and be far from direct light heat and humidity Place the machine in the environment where it meets the operating temperature and humidity specification Otherwise quality problems
272. r service Imaging Unit Failure error number Install imaging unit again The imaging unit is not installed Install the imaging unit If it is already installed try to reinstall the imaging unit If the problem persists call for service Lamp Failure error number Open the door then close it Call for service if the problem persists There is a problem in the lamp Open the door then close it If the problem persists call for service Imaging unit Failure error number Call for service There is a problem in the imaging unit Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Load tray number with Letter Plain paper Thepapersize specified in the printer properties does not match the paper you are loading Load the correct paper in the tray Imaging unit is not compatible Check users guide The imaging unit you have installed is not for your machine Install a Samsung genuine imaging unit designed for your machine see Available consumables on page 234 LSU Failure error number Please turn off then on Input System Failure error number Check tray number connection There is a problem in the tray Open and close the tray If the problem persists call for service LSU Failure error number Turn off then on Call for service if the problem persists There is a problem in the LSU
273. re hidden and shown Preview displays the original scanned image Button Name Description Setting View changed options list ES History 5 Preview for Shows the job preview E status 5 Scan amp Send Scanning g Understanding the Scan 4 Send screen Button Name Description Selecting the color mode a for Scans for job Use one of the following options to use for the scan Ko Mono Use black and white 1 bit per pixel O 2 This button appears to edit when e Gray Use grayscale 8 bit per pixel scanning Adjust the prescanned image with operation functions such as rotate and crop Color Use color 24 bit per pixel each of the RGB channels has 8 bits Selecting the original type S Start Starts a job Use the original type setting to improve copy quality by selecting the appropriate document type for a copy job Text Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images Adjusting the brightness Text Photo Use if the original is a mix of text and images You can adjust the brightness level of a copy if needed for easier reading if the original contains faint markings or dark images Adjust the brightness level using the slider This feature allows you to print dark images lighter or light images darker k Sub menu Action overflow Photo Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images Tap Darkness to show the slider control Add to my program
274. reless laptop or desktop devices WPA PSK generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security WPS The Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS is a standard for establishing a wireless home network If your wireless access point supports WPS you can configure the wireless network connection easily without a computer XPS XML Paper Specification XPS is a specification for a Page Description Language PDL and a new document format which has benefits for portable document and electronic document developed by Microsoft It is an XML based specification based on a new print path and a vector based device independent document format Glossary Index A accessories installing ordering accounting address book group inividual adjusting altitude AirPrint alerts altitude adjustment answering machine fax AnyWeb Print application enable disable installing managing uninstalling Viewing authentication login 237 235 164 162 162 162 281 286 340 161 281 286 137 167 293 294 294 293 294 294 289 160 280 authority 164 B booklet printing 75 booklets 75 C certificate 163 checking stored document 348 cleaning inside 350 outside 349 pickup roller 352 scan unit 353 cleaning a machine 349 connect printer cable 24 control panel 23 convention 14 copy setting 162 copying basic copying 103 116 understanding the copy screen 94 10
275. res Using overlay This option is available only when you use the PCL printer driver Whatis an overlay An overlay is text and or images stored on the computer hard drive HDD as a special file format that can be printed on any document Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper Rather than using preprinted letterhead you can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead To print a letter with your company s letterhead you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the machine just print the letterhead overlay on your document AA woRLD seer Creating a new page overlay To use a page overlay you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image ag Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new page overlay Position the items exactly as you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay To save the document as an overlay access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 66 Click the Advanced tab and select Create from the Overlay drop down list In the Save As window type a name up to eight characters in the File name box Select the destination path if necessary The default is C Formover Click Save Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window When a confirming message window appears click Yes The file is not printed Instead it is store
276. res and step by step instructions WA Read the safety information before using the machine If you have a problem using the machine refer to the troubleshooting chapter in the user s guide on the User s Guide CD see Troubleshooting on page 184 Terms used in this administrator s guide are explained in the glossary chapter see Glossary on page 366 The illustrations in this administrator s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models but the procedures are the same The screenshots some menus in this administrator s guide may differ from your machine depending on the machine s firmware driver version The procedures in this administrator s guide are mainly based on Windows 7 Convention The following table offers the conventions of this guide Convention Description Example Bold For texts on the display or button names on the machine Start Note Provides additional information or detailed specification of the machine function and feature 9 The date format may differ from country to country Caution Gives users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical damage or malfunction Do not touch the surface of the drum located in the toner cartridge or imaging unit Footnote Provides additional information on certain words or a phrase a pages per minute Cross reference Guides users to a reference page for the additional detailed informa
277. rint Setup Utility or Print amp Fax Open Terminal program Move to uld folder extracted from Unified Linux Driver package Execute uninstall sh command If you re not logged in as root execute the command with sudo as sudo uninstall sh Proceed with uninstallation 1 Introduction las 2 Media and Tray This chapter provides information on how to load originals and print media into your machine Loading originals Selecting print media Loading paper in the tray Printing on special media Setting the paper size and type Selecting an output location Loading originals You can use the scanner glass or the dual scan document feeder DSDF to load an original for copying scanning and sending a fax On the scanner glass Using the scanner glass you can copy or scan originals You can get the best scan quality especially for colored or gray scaled images Make sure that no originals are in the document feeder If an original is detected in the document feeder the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass Preparing originals Do not load paper larger than 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches Make sure any glue ink or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading 1 Open the DSDF 2 Media and Tray G Loading originals Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass 2 e Le
278. rs 5 Uninstall Samsung Printer Software From the Windows 8 Start Screen For Windows 8 pin sa 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and 1 From Charms select Search gt Apps powered on Search and click Control Panel 2 Click on the Uninstall Samsung Printer Software tile in the Start Click Programs and Features screen 2 3 4 Right click the driver you want to uninstall and select Uninstall 5 Follow the instructions in the window w Follow the instructions in the window If you cannot find a Samsung Printer Software tile uninstall from the 3 Follow the instructions in the installation window 2 desktop screen mode If you want to uninstall Samsung s printer management tools from the Start screen right click the app 5 Uninstall 5 right click the program you want to delete 5 Uninstall and follow the instruction in the window 1 Introduction CI J Reinstalling the driver If the printer driver does not work properly uninstall the driver and reinstall it If the printer driver does not work properly uninstall the driver and reinstall it U BF W N Open the Applications folder gt Samsung gt Printer Software Uninstaller To uninstall printer software click Continue Check the program you want to delete and click Uninstall Enter the password and click OK After the uninstallation is finished click Close If a machine has already been added delete it from the P
279. rsal Serial Bus USB is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum Inc to connect computers and peripherals Unlike the parallel port USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna Italy in 1282 they have been used by papermakers to identify their product and also on postage stamps currency and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802 11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another WIA Windows Imaging Architecture WIA is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA compliant scanner WPA Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a class of systems to secure wireless Wi Fi computer networks which was created to improve upon the security features of WEP Glossary Glossary WPA PSK WPA PSK WPA Pre Shared Key is special mode of WPA for small business or home users A shared key or password is configured in the wireless access point WAP and any wi
280. rvice 149 Understanding the Scan amp Send screen 108 Accessing management tools 158 Basic scan 116 SyncThru Web Service 159 Scanning with TWAIN enabled software 117 Easy Capture Manager 166 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 118 Samsung AnyWeb Print 167 Mac scanning 120 Easy Eco Driver 168 Linux scanning 121 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 169 Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager 170 Using Samsung Printer Status 173 Using Samsung Printer Experience 175 Preparing to fax 123 Using Box 181 Using a fax in your computer 124 Understanding the fax screen 126 Sending a fax 135 Receiving a fax 137 Redistributing toner 185 Replacing the toner cartridge 187 7 Setting up an Address Book Replacing the imaging unit 199 Tips for avoiding paper jams 191 Understanding the address screen 143 Clearing jams 192 Using the control panel 145 Understanding display messages 208 Power and cable connecting problems 213 Solving other problems 214 10 Supplies and Accessories Ordering supplies and accessories 233 Available consumables 234 Available accessories 235 Available maintenance parts 236 Installing accessories 237 Checking replaceable s lifespan 241 Using a USB Drive device 242 11 Appendix Specifications 247 Regulatory information 257 Copyright 269 1 Introduction These are the main components of your machine Key benefits Features by model Useful to know About this user s guide Safety information Machine overview
281. s Book 154 Using SyncThru Web Service Deleting address groups from the address book Checking address groups Opena web browser from your networked computer You can see information about address groups and add or delete individual addresses from the group in the Group Details window 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in the browser for example http 123 123 123 123 1 Open a web browser from your networked computer 3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service page 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in the browser for example http 123 123 123 123 Click Login J 3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service page Enter the ID and password and select a domain as you log in the Ul machine 4 Click Login Click Login 5 Enter the ID and password and select a domain as you log in the machine Click Address Book Click Login Click Groups Click Address Book Check the box for the groups you want to delete O ON OO Click Groups Click Delete Group Click the group address you want to see and click Group Details O ON Q Click OK when the confirmation window appears 7 Setting up an Address Book 155 Using SyncThru Web Service L You can add individual addresses directly Check the addresses you want to add to Group Address Book in Individual Address Book You can delete individual addresses directly Ch
282. s not set up properly e Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on then restart your computer e The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off Faxing problems Condition The machine is not working there is no display or the buttons are not working Suggested solutions Unplug the power cord and plug it in again e Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet e Ensure that the power is turned on 9 Troubleshooting 225 i Solving other problems Condition No dial tone Suggested solutions e Check that the phone line is properly connected see Rear view on page 22 e Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone e Find the optimal line for communication see General fax settings on page 139 The numbers stored in memory do not dial correctly Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly To check that print an address book list The original does not feed into the machine Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly Check that the original is the right size not too thick or thin e Make sure that the document feeder is firmly closed e The document feeder rubber pad may need to be replaced Contact a service representative Faxes are not received automatically e The receiving mode should be set to fax e Make sure that there is pa
283. s will override settings you specify in the printer driver Change all print settings available in the software application first and change any remaining settings using the printer driver Click OK 0 9 If you want to change the settings for each print job change it in Printing Preferences 1 Click the Windows Start menu For Windows 8 from the Charms select Search gt Settings 2 For Windows XP Server 2003 select Printer and Faxes For Windows Server 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 8 select Control Panel gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 3 Right click on your machine 4 For Windows XP Server 2003 Server 2008 Vista select Printing Preferences For Windows 7 8 or Windows Server 2008 R2 from context menus select Printing preferences KA If Printing preferences has a gt you can select other printer drivers connected to the selected printer 3 Printing 8a Setting your machine as a default machine Js Click the Windows Start menu For Windows 8 from the Charms select Search gt Settings For Windows XP Server 2003 select Printer and Faxes For Windows Server 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 8 select Control Panel gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Har
284. send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer Print Media The media like paper envelopes labels and transparencies which can be used in a printer a scanner a fax or a copier PPM Pages Per Minute PPM is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute PRN file An interface for a device driver this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input output system calls which simplifies many tasks A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection communication and data transfer between two computing endpoints PS See PostScript PSTN The Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN is the network of the world s public circuit switched telephone networks which on industrial premises is usually routed through the switchboard RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS is a protocol for remote user authentication and accounting RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA authentication authorization and accounting concept to manage network access Resolution The sharpness of an image measured in Dots Per Inch DPI The higher the dpi the greater the resolution Glossary Glossary SMB TCP IP Server Message Block SMB is a network protocol mainly applied to
285. ser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL 2 Select one of the IPv6 addresses Stateless Address Stateful Address Manual Address from Network Configuration Report r You can get the machine s IPv6 address from the machine report see Report on page 295 3 Enter the IPv6 addresses eg http Zffe 10 88 194 213 77ff fe82 75b A The address must be enclosed in brackets 4 Your machine s SyncThru Web Service website opens Logging into SyncThru Web Service Before configuring options in SyncThru Web Service you need to log in as an administrator You can still use SyncThru Web Service without logging in but you will not have access to or view the Settings tab and the Security tab Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website A log in page appears Type in the ID and Password and select the Domain Then click on LOGIN Use the same login ID Password Domain as when logging in from the machine see Log in on page 280 If you want to create a new user or change the password see Security tab on page 163 8 Management Tools 160 SyncThru Web Service This tab gives you general information about your machine You can check things such as the machine s status supplies status count information network information and more You can also print reports such as configuration page Active Alerts You can check the c
286. share files printers serial ports and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network It also provides an authenticated Inter process communication mechanism SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP is the standard for e mail transmissions across the Internet SMTP is a relatively simple text based protocol where one or more recipients of a message are specified and then the message text is transferred It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to the server SSID Service Set Identifier SSID is a name of a wireless local area network WLAN All wireless devices ina WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other The SSIDs are case sensitive and have a maximum length of 32 characters Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address The Transmission Control Protocol TCP and the Internet Protocol IP the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run TCR Transmission Confirmation Report TCR provides details of each transmission such as job status transmission result and number of pages sent This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions TIFF Tagged Image File Format TIFF is a variable resolution bitmap
287. solution Understanding the Scan 4 Send screen Delay Send Set your machine to send a fax at scheduled time Define the Job Name and Start Time You can delay a fax by any length of time starting 1 minute and 24 hours after the scan y EJ Email Settings Set email information such as From Subject and Message Original Type Use this setting to improve copy quality by selecting the appropriate document type for the current job Text Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images Text Photo Use if the original is a mix of text and images Photo Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images Ol Original Size Use this option to set the actual paper size of the originals Mixed Size Automatically detect the size of original if the original uses a combination of different paper types Custom size If you need to set a custom value for a special size of paper use the arrows to set the required size h Original Orientation Use this option to set the orientation of the original Upright Images The original is in landscape orientation The images or text in the original are parallel to the long edge of the page Sideways Images The original is in portrait orientation The images or text in the original are perpendicular to the long edge of the page Color Mode Use this option to set the default color mode used for copy jobs Mono Displays an image in black and white Gray Displays an ima
288. ss and print K If you want to create a new user or change the password see Security tab documents both from Wi Fi Direct and from a wired network on page 163 3 Tap Wi Fi Direct 3 Network Setup gg Wireless network setup Optional 4 Enable Wi Fi Direct Troubleshooting for wireless network If problems occur while using the machine on a network check the following From the network connected computer If your printer is using a network cable or a wireless access point you can enable and configure Wi Fi Direct from SyncThru Web Service a For information on the access point or wireless router refer to its own Access SyncThru Web Service and select Settings gt Network user s guide Settings gt Wi Fi gt Wi Fi Direct 2 Enable Wi Fi Direct and set other options e Your computer access point or wireless router or machine may not be turned on Check the wireless reception around the machine If the router is far from Setting up the mobile device the machine or there is an obstacle you might have difficulty receiving the signal After setting up Wi Fi Direct from the printer refer to the user manual of the mobile device you are using to set its Wi Fi Direct e Cycle the power for the access point or wireless router machine and computer Sometimes cycling the power can recover network After setting up Wi Fi Direct you need to download the mobile printing communication applicati
289. ss devices are closely regulated and use may not be allowed The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time Because the wireless devices which may be embedded into your printer emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use Regardless of the power levels care should be taken to minimize human contact during normal operation 11 Appendix 266 Regulatory information As a general guideline a separation of 20 cm 8 inches between the wireless device and the body for use of a wireless device near the body this does not include extremities is typical This device should be used more than 20 cm 8 inches from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices Examples of common restrictions are listed below A Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane IEEE 802 11 also known as wireless Ethernet and Bluetooth communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication In environments where th
290. ss of accuracy or quality which was designed for compression of binary images particularly for faxes but can also be used on other images JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web Glossary Glossary LDAP MH The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP IP LED A Light Emitting Diode LED is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine MAC address Media Access Control MAC address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter MAC address is a unique 48 bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs e g 00 00 0c 34 11 4e This address is usually hard coded into a Network Interface Card NIC by its manufacturer and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks MFP Multi Function Peripheral MFP is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body so as to have a printer a copier a fax a scanner and etc Modified Huffman MH is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU T T 4 MH is a codebook based run length
291. st Build Job This option can be turned on or off When this option is on After the scanning is finished the Scan More window appears to ask if you want to scan another page If you select Yes then you can scan another page in the current job If you select No then the scanning process is completed and the remainder of the job is performed Proof Copy Allows you to print a test copy to check the quality and alignment of the printout Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to print a proof copy After ensuring that the copy is perfect tap the Start button to print the rest of the copies ID Copy Allows you to copy both sides of a two sided original onto one sheet of paper This feature is helpful for copying originals with important information on both sides such as driver s licenses Save to Box Allows you to save scanned originals to the hard disk drive in the machine You can then print these saved documents at a later date or store them as printable files Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to save a document to the hard disk drive in the machine Save as Default Allows you to save the current copy options as the default copy settings After you save the default copy settings all future copy tasks use these settings Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to save the current settings as the default settings Restore Default Allows you to restore the copy settings to the default settings of the machine This o
292. st accept any interference received including interference The California Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act requires the Governor of California that may cause undesired operation to publish a list of chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer or reproductive toxicity 3 sn and requires businesses to warn of potential exposure to such chemicals This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class WARNING This product contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed birth defects or other reproductive harm to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential This appliance can cause low level exposure to the chemicals i i Which can be minimized by operating the appliance in a well ventilated area installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception ER which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following AB HAR BIT ES ARFER measures ANG
293. st search for download the app and try again 8 Registration complete message appears on the printer s touch screen 3 Press Export 4 Type in the ID and Password Using the Samsung Mobile Print Manager App Use the same admin ID Password as when logging in from the machine see Log in on page 280 If you have more than one printer and need to set the same settings on each printer you can easily do it using the Samsung Mobile Print Manager app 9 If you want to create a new user or change the password see Security tab Touch your cellphone on the NFC tag on your printer to copy the settings and On page 163 tap on the printer you want to set the setting When exporting the data you can save more than one data When importing the data you can select the data from the list and import Exporting Copying the setting to your mobile device Check that NFC and Wi Fi Direct enabled features are on your mobile device and Wi Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer Open Samsung Mobile Print Manager from your mobile device 2 3 Network Setup 331 Using the NFC feature Optional Tag your mobile device usually located on the back of the mobile Importing Applying the settings to the machine device over the NFC tag nec on your printer Wait few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer 1 Check that NFC and Wi Fi Direct enabled features are on your mobile device and Wi Fi Direct feature is enabled
294. sung folder 5 Samsung Scan Assistant 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 120 Linux scanning 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Launch a scan application such as xsane or simple scan f it s not installed please install it manually to use scan features For example you may use yum install xsane for rom package systems and apt get install xsane for deb package systems to install xsane 3 Select your device from the list and set the scan options to apply 4 Click the Scan button 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 121 6 Scan amp Send Faxing This guide gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine Preparing to fax Using a fax in your computer Understanding the fax screen Sending a fax Receiving a fax Preparing to fax 2 e You cannot use this machine as a fax through the internet phone For more information ask your internet service provider e We recommend you use traditional analog phone services like PSTN public switched telephone network when using a phone line as a fax line If you use internet services DSL ISDN VoIP you can improve the connection quality by using a micro filter A micro filter reduces noise and improves connection quality Since a DSL micro filter is not provided with the machine contact your internet service provider LINE EXT o s KASI 1 Line port 2 Micro filter 3 DSL modem Telephone line Before you sen
295. t The higher e Off Disable this feature quality you select the larger file size e Left Page Scans only the left page of the book OCR Language When producing scanned output for OCR software select the appropriate language Right Page Scans only the right page of the book Both Pages From Left Scans both facing pages from the left page Fax Options Both Pages From Right Scans both facing pages from the right page If you send originals that are of poor quality or contain photographs you can Book Center amp Edge Erase You can set shaded areas to erase shadows adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality fax caused by bindings or book edges from the center and side edges of copies Resolution Gp Advanced Fax fax user only Standard Usually recommended for originals with text This option will reduce the transmission time Set the sending options for fax such as Quick Start Fax and Delay Send Fine Recommended for the originals containing small characters thin lines or text from a dot matrix printer OT Disables tis tearule Quick Start Fax The machine will begin to transmit the fax right after the first page has been scanned Originals with many pages can be sent this way without overflowing the machine s memory 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 113 Super Fine Recommended for originals containing fine details This option is only available if the receiving machine also supports Super Fine re
296. te data stored in the memory The machine overwrites the data with different patterns eliminating the possibilities of recovery This feature may not be available depending on models or option kits installed Automatic Image Overwrite When a job is completed there are temporal images left in the memory For security reasons you can set the machine to automatically overwrite secure non volatile memory If you want to secure memory space you can set the machine to automatically overwrite secure non volatile memory Manual Image Overwrite When printing copying scanning and faxing the machine temporarily uses memory space For security reasons you can set the machine to manually overwrite secure non volatile memory If you want to secure memory space you can manually overwrite secure non volatile memory You can set the machine to repeat the manual image overwrite after the system is rebooted Scheduled Image Overwrite you can set the schedule to manually overwrite the image Overwrite Method You can select the method for overwriting the secure non volatile memory hard German VSITR Select to overwrite the memory 7 times When overwriting for the 6 times alternate 0x00 and Oxff are used to overwrite the disk and in the 7th time the disk is written with OxAA DoD5220 28 M Select to overwrite the memory 3 times When overwriting three times patterns 0x35 OxCA 0x97 are used to overwrite the disk s content This
297. te machine try pressing 9 once again 6 Scan amp Send Faxing Receiving a fax Tab On to enable this feature N 2 e Ifyou have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine is turned off or no answering machine is connected to the EXT socket your machine automatically enters Fax mode after a predefined number When the machine receives a fax in this mode Print option becomes of rings available If you want to print the secured faxes tap Print All secured faxes e If your answering machine has a configurable ring counter set it to will then be printed answer incoming calls before it rings more than once l e Ifyou are in Telephone mode when the answering machine is connected to your machine you must switch off the answering machine 3 Ifyou want to set a passcode tab the passcode blank and enter a Otherwise outgoing messages from the answering machine will passcode interrupt your phone conversations 4 If you want incoming faxes to be always saved to memory tap Whole Day Otherwise proceed to the next step CCRT F 5 Tap Start Time and set the specific start time using the up down Receiving in Secure Receive mode buttons Tap Set when finished You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by 6 TapEndTimeand set the specific end time using the up down buttons unauthorized people You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict printing Tap Set when finished of i
298. ter or to a wireless printer through a Wi Fi access Android Search for Samsung Mobile Print from Play Store and then point Installing a new driver or configuring network settings isn t necessary download the app just simply install the Samsung Mobile Print application and it will automatically detect compatible Samsung printers Besides printing photos web pages and PDFs scanning is also supported If you have a Samsung multifunction scan any document into a JPG PDF or PNG format for quick Samsung Mobile Print Pro Samusng Mobile Print Manager and easy viewing on your mobile device see Using the Samsung Mobile Print App on page 334 iOS Search for Samsung Mobile Print from App Store and then download the app Android Search for Samsung Mobile Print Pro or Samusng Mobile Print Manager from Play Store and then download the app Samsung Mobile Print Pro Helps users to get an authentication easily This app provides one way of getting a user authentication using your mobile device see Using the Samsung Mobile Print Pro App on page 329 Supported Mobile OS Samusng Mobile Print Manager Enables users to use cloning and wireless setup features using your mobile device see Using the Samsung Mobile Samsung Mobile Print Print Manager App on page 331 Android OS 2 3 or higher iOS 5 0 or higher 3 Network Setup 338 Supported Mobile Apps Samsung Mobile Print Pro Samusng Mobile Print Manager NFC and Wi F
299. the home screen or Apps select the job you want to delete see Job Status on page 34 You cannot send emails with the machine while it is sending a fax Sending a fax using speed dial numbers When you are prompted to enter a destination number for your fax you can use a speed dial number previously set by you L 1 500 can be assigned for the speed dial numbers For one digit speed dial numbers press and hold the corresponding number on the numeric keypad on the control panel For two or more digit speed dial numbers press the first digit button and hold the last number on the numeric keypad on the control panel Resending automatically If the line is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax the machine automatically redials the number To change the time interval between redials and or the number of redial attempts follow the steps below Tap Settings gt Fax Settings gt Redial on the display screen Delaying a fax transmission You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time see General fax settings on page 139 K To cancel a delayed fax tap Off before it is sent 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 136 Receiving a fax This section explains how to receive faxes and the special options available Changing Receive Mode Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory When you receive a fax the machine answers the call after a specified number of rings and automatic
300. the option is only available if the receiving machine also supports Super first page has been scanned Originals with many pages can be sent this way Fine resolution without overflowing the machine s memory 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 131 Understanding the fax screen Delay Send Set your machine to send a fax at scheduled time Define the Job Name and Start Time You can delay a fax by any length of time starting 1 minute and 24 hours after the scan y EJ Email Settings Set email information such as From Subject and Message Original Type Use this setting to improve copy quality by selecting the appropriate document type for the current job Text Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images Text Photo Use if the original is a mix of text and images Photo Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images Ol Original Size Use this option to set the actual paper size of the originals Mixed Size Automatically detect the size of original if the original uses a combination of different paper types Custom size If you need to set a custom value for a special size of paper use the arrows to set the required size TA Original Orientation Use this option to set the orientation of the original Upright Images The original is in landscape orientation The images or text in the original are parallel to the long edge of the page Sideways Images The original is in portrait orientation The i
301. the Samsung Mobile Print Pro App device over the NFC tag Nec on your printer Wait few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer You can use it to get an authentication registration from the Samsung Mobile Print Pro app Authentication from the mobile device NG I 1 Check that NFC and Wi Fi Direct enabled features are on your mobile device and Wi Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer Open Samsung Mobile Print Pro app N a A i you do not have Samsung Mobile Print Pro installed on your cellphone go to the application store Samsung Apps Play Store App Store on your mobile device and just search for download the app and try again KU For some mobile devices NFC tag might not be located at the back of the mobile device Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile device before tagging 3 Type in the ID and Password Use the same admin ID Password as when logging in from the machine see Log in on page 280 3 Network Setup gg Using the NFC feature Optional Registration from the mobile device N Check that NFC and Wi Fi Direct enabled features are on your mobile device and Wi Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer Open Samsung Mobile Print Pro app If you do not have Samsung Mobile Print Pro installed on your cellphone go to the application store Samsung Apps Play Store on your mobile device and just search for download the app an
302. the software CD into your CD ROM drive For windows select the printer driver and software in the Select Software to Install window Software M458x series SPL printer driver PCL printer driver PS printer driver XPS printer driver Features by model Software M458x series Direct Printing Utility e Samsung Easy Printer Manager Scan to PC Settings Fax to PC Settings Device Settings Samsung Printer Status Samsung AnyWeb Print Samsung Easy Document Creator Easy Capture Manager SyncThru Web Service SyncThru Admin Web Service Easy Eco Driver Fax Samsung Network PC Fax Scan Twain scan driver e a Download the software from the Samsung website and install it http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads Before installing check whether your computer s OS support the software Supported Blank Not supported Features by model Variety feature Features M458x series Hi Speed USB 2 0 Network Interface Ethernet 10 100 1000 Base TX wired LAN Network Interface 802 11b g n wireless LAN Google Cloud Print AirPrint Wireless NFC kit Eco printing Duplex 2 sided printing USB Drive device Memory module Optional tray SCF Short Stand Document Dual Scan Document Feeder DSDF Feeder Automat
303. ting section in the user s guide Supplies You can view the percentage of toner remaining in Information each toner cartridge The machine and the number of toner cartridge s shown in the above window may 2 differ depending on the machine in use Some machines do not have this feature Option a You can set printing job alert related settings Order Supplies You can order replacement toner cartridge s from 4 online Cancel Print Cancel Print If print job is waiting in the print r queue or printer cancel all user s print jobs in the print queue or the printer Close a 5 e Close Depending on the status of the machine or the supported functions the Close button may appear to close the status window 8 Management Tools Using Samsung Printer Experience Samsung Printer Experience is a Samsung application that combines Samsung machine settings and machine management into one location You 2 The screenshot may differ depending on the model you are using can set device settings order supplies open troubleshooting guides visit Samsung s website and check connected machine information This application will be automatically downloaded from the Windows Store if the machine is Samsung Printer Experience connected to a computer with an Internet connection A A ER EE 1 2 6 KA Available for Windows 8 users only User sae s 5 3 7 4 Understanding the Samsung Printer Experience
304. tion See Glossary on page 366 1 About this Administrator s Guide Intended audience The expected user for this guide is an administrator with an understanding of e General knowledge of machine and other optional parts e Basic technical knowledge e The network printing environment e Network protocols subnets security features addresses Windows operating systems on server and client computers 1 About this Administrator s Guide Security policies for administrators Administrators need to adhere to the following policies in order to securely manage the machine e The administrator should place the machine in a secure place where the machine can be protected by the physical contact or modulation e The administrator should be fully aware of the security policies the organization has and follow them to manage the machine e The administrator should give the right to use the machine to users according to the security policies and procedures e The administrator should not use the authority one has over the machine with ill intention e The administrator should manage the machine in a trusted network supported environment e The administrator should guarantee that the certifying service via certification server is through a safe channel and is safely managed e Theadministrator should provide a Time Stamp feature to keep an accurate system log history e The administrator should provide a safe se
305. tionary attacks and does not support key generation PEAP Recommended for users who only intend to use Microsoft desktop clients and servers For other users it is not recommended EAP MS CHAPv2 MS CHAPv2 provides two way authentication between peers by combining a peer Challenge message with the Response packet and an authenticator Response message on the Success packet TLS This is used to provide secure communication over the Internet between a client and server The Wi Fi Menu is available only if the optional Wireless NFC kit is installed see Wireless network setup Optional on page 320 The sub menus in the Wi Fi menu are nearly identical to the sub menus in the Ethernet menu see Ethernet on page 297 Description Feature Wi Fi Networks After the machine connects to the wireless network the access point router SSID appears on the display screen WPS Settings If your machine and access point or wireless router support Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS then you can easily configure the wireless network settings through the WPS Settings menu without the need for a computer Wi Fi Direct Wi Fi Direct is a secure and easy to use peer to peer connection between a Wi Fi Direct enabled printer and mobile device Network Protocol You can enable disable what you want network protocol 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 299 Network Settings Network Security Feature
306. tions Clean the inside of the machine Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative Check the paper type and quality see Print media specifications on page 249 Remove the imaging unit and install a new one Contact a service representative If the problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Condition Curl AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc Suggested Solutions If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray e Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Character Voids L__ Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper Remove the paper and turn it around The paper may not meet paper specifications see Print media specifications on page 249 Horizontal stripes KaBbe AaBbo AaBbcC AaBbocd AaBbG If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear The imaging unit may be installed improperly Remove the imaging unit and reinsert it The imaging unit may be defective Remove the imaging unit and install a new one Contact a service representative If the problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative SING Preferences click Paper tab and set type to thin pape
307. to 24 Ib bond 50 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib bond Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm 4 33 x 8 66 inches Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm 6 37 x 9 01 inches 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm 4 48 x 6 38 inches 50 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib bond Multi purpose tray 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond 10 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib bond Thick paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 91 to 120 g m 24 to 32 Ib bond 90 to 120 g m 24 to 32 Ib bond Thicker paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1 optional tray 164 to 220 g m 44 to 59 Ib bond Thin paper Letter Legal Oficio US Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 69 g m 16 to 19 Ib bond 60 to 69 g m 16 to 19 Ib bond oY a 550 sheets 100 sheets Executive A5 Statement Labels 9 Letter Legal Oficio US Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g m 32 to 40 Ib bond 120 to 150 g m 32 to 40 Ib bond Folio A4 JIS B5 ISO B5 a h e T10 sheet Executive A5 A6 aa aa Statement Card stock Refer to the Plain paper Refer to the Plain paper section 121 to 163 g m 32 to 43lb bond 121 to 163 g m 32 to 43lb bond section 50 sheets 10sheets 11 Appendix 250 i Specifications Type Recycled Size Letter Legal Oficio US Folio A4 JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive A5 Statement Dimensions
308. tray Clear the jam see In tray1 on page 192 Paper is empty in tray number Load paper Thereis no paperin the tray Load paper in the tray Paper is empty in tray MP Load paper Thereis no paperin the multi purpose tray Load paper in the multi purpose tray Paper jamin Tray 2 Clear the jam see In optional tray on page 193 Paper is low in tray number Load paper Running out of paper in the tray Load paper in the tray Paper Jam at the bottom of duplex path Paper Jam inside of duplex path Paper Jam at the top of duplex path Paper has jammed during duplex printing Clear the jam see In the duplex unit area on page 201 Prepare new imaging unit The estimated life of the imaging unit is close Prepare a new imaging unit for a replacement see Replacing the imaging unit on page 189 Prepare new toner cartridge The estimated cartridge life of toner is close Prepare a new cartridge for a replacement You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner see Redistributing toner on page 185 9 Troubleshooting gg Understanding display messages Message Rear door is open Close the door Meaning The door is not securely latched Suggested solutions Close the door until it locks into place Replace with new toner cartridge The indicated toner cartridge h
309. tray with paper from a new package e In high humidity areas do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time Frequent copy paper jams occur e Fan the stack of paper then turn it over in the tray Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply Check adjust the paper guides if necessary e Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight e Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared Toner cartridge produces fewer copies than expected before running out of toner e Your originals may contain pictures solids or heavy lines For example your originals may be forms newsletters books or other documents that use more toner e The DSDF may be left open while copies are being made e The machine may be turned on and off frequently 9 Troubleshooting 223 Solving other problems Scanning problems Condition Suggested solutions The scanner does not work e Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass or face up in the document feeder see Loading originals on page 45 e There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan Try the Prescan function to see if that works Try lowering the scan resolution rate e Check that the machine printer cable is connected properly e Make sure that the machine printer cable is not defective Switch the printer cable with a known
310. try 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 140 Receiving a fax Option Junk Fax Setup Description Use this feature to reject faxes sent from numbers stored in memory as junk fax numbers This feature is useful to block any unwanted faxes When you turn this feature on you can access additional options to set junk fax numbers This option may not be available in your country Secure Receive Set the machine to save the received faxes in memory so that unauthorized people cannot access them when you are absent This option restricts printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended Off Select to not use secure receive e On Select to use secure receive e Print Select to print faxes in the memory You need to log in as an administrator to print out received faxes in memory Received Fax Printing Set options to print received faxes Fax Country Setting Select a country as default Before changing this connect a telephone line to the machine When you change the country a ping test is performed Option Smart Fax Diagnostics Description The Smart Fax feature optimizes the settings for your fax line e Auto Configuration When sending and receiving faxes the machine regularly checks for errors and automatically configures the fax settings to ensure a stable connection Start Allows you to automatically detect or manually specify the environment when sending or receiving
311. tting the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document Font Text Select Clear Text to print text darker than on a normal document Check All Text Black to print in solid black regardless of the color it appears on the screen Graphic Controller It allows user to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability and align each color channel registration in color printing mode Toner Save The Toner Save setting allows the user to save printing toner when printing a draft version of adocument Select Off to print in normal mode and select On to print with less toner applied to the page Advanced tab Use the Advanced tab to set various printing options Watermark See Using watermarks on page 78 Overlay See Using overlay on page 80 3 Printing 69 Opening printing preferences Output options Job Accounting Print Order This options allows you to set the sequence in which the pages This option allows you to print with the given permission will print Print Odd Pages and Print Even Pages are available only when you use the PCL printer driver User permission If you check this option only users with user permission can start a print job Skip Blank Pages This option allows you to specify not to print blank pages in the original data Group permission If you check this option only groups
312. tual component may differ from the illustration below Some components may change depending on the circumstances Machine Imaging unit Power cord Quick installation guide Software CD Misc accessories a The software CD contains the print drivers user s guide and software applications b Miscellaneous accessories included with your machine may vary by country of purchase and specific model 1 Introduction EJ Machine overview 1 Dual scan document feeder cover 12 Tray handle 2 Dual scan document feeder width guides Tray 1 Dual scan document feeder input tray ia fees ere pHee 4 Dual scan document feeder output 14 f Hay Multi purpose tray 5 Control panel 16 Front cover release button 6 Control board cover 17 Output tray 7 Front cover 18 Output support tray 8 Handle 19 USB Drive device port 9 Optional tray 20 Scanner glass 10 Stand 21 Scanner lid 11 Paper level indicator 22 Control panel unlock button a Optional feature 1 Introduction lan Machine overview 1 Toner cartridge SS 1 Wireless NFC kit port cover 6 Network port 2 Imaging unit 2 Rear cover handle 7 EDI port for card reader 3 Multi purpose support tray 3 Rear cover 8 USB port 4 Paper width guides on a multi purpose tray 4 Extension telephone socket IN loaner EXT 5 Telephone line socket LINE 10 Power receptacle
313. ty to move delete widgets apps and shortcuts as well as use functions like Set Wallpaper or Add to Home Screen Initial settings administrator only You can change the initial settings when you first turn the machine on If you want to stop adjusting the initial settings press Exit The settings you have set so far will be saved However the Exit button is not enabled if it s the first time using this option Language Select the language to use on the display screen then tap Next Note Read and tap Next Administrator Account Input the Name New Password Confirm Password The admin is entered as a default in Name field Date amp Time Set the Date Time Time Zone date and hour format and Day light Saving K Example for selecting the time zone select your country area Device Attribution Remove the existing device name and enter the device name you want to use then tap Next Keep in mind to enter the device name to be used on the network K If necessary enter the location of the machine in the Location field If necessary enter the information in the Administrator field for the person to contact when any problem occurs on the machine 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 291 Admin Settings Verify Connections Tap the Test button to verify the Ethernet Card connection When Connected appears after tap the Test button press Next If Not connected appears make sure that the mac
314. u can set print related settings When there is no specific input for printing options the machine prints with the settings you set here Set the frequently used printing settings This feature can be useful if your company has a specific printing form see Print Settings on page 292 Box Settings Allows you to check the current box settings and change the settings if necessary see Box Settings on page 293 General Settings Allows you to set up the genaral settings Measurement Supplies Management Contention Management and other settings see General Settings on page 290 Report Settings The paper source setting specifies the default paper tray that the machine uses to print reports Initial Settings Allows you to set the basic settings needed to be set before using the machine see Initial settings administrator only on page 291 Fax Settings You can set the default fax options Set the most frequently used fax settings see General fax settings on page 139 Application Management You can install or uninstall applications license If you add an application you need to activate the license of the installed application Some applications may not have a license see Application Management on page 293 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu Admin Settings Allows you to set up the security related settings Image Overwrite You can set the machine to overwri
315. uct and its electronic accessories e g charger headset USB cable mmm should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal please separate these items from other s of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources X This marking on the product accessories or literature indicates that the Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product or their local government office for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal 11 Appendix 259 Regulatory information The United States of America only Radio frequency emissions Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler To find the nearest recycling location go to our website www samsung com recyclingdirect Or call 877 278 0799 FCC information to the user This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions State of California Proposition 65 Warning USA Only This device may not cause harmful interference and e This device mu
316. uide in examples LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol instructions and descriptions SLP Service Location Protocol Acronyms Meaning SMB Server Message Block DBMS Data Base Management System ane Sy CTD Service EAP MD5 Extensible Authentication Protocol Message Digest 5 WINS VA E IERE NAE ives WSD Web Service for Device 1 About this Administrator s Guide Terminology used in this guide See Glossary on page 366 1 About this Administrator s Guide 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu This chapter explains the Settings menu provided by your machine The Settings menu provides various options for administrators to set in order to use the machine to its full capabilities Log in 280 Language and Input 281 Machine 282 Admin Settings 287 Management 295 Network Settings 297 System 301 WA This administrator s guide mainly describes features administrators would often use and settings to set before using the machine For some options you need to contact your local service provider to set the settings Some menus may not appear on the display screen depending on the settings or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Some options are only available to the administrator depending on the authentication settings selected see Authentication on page 289 Log in Depending on the authentication settings you selected you may need to log in as an administrator to access so
317. ument face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 45 Start Applications and click Image Capture WwW A IfNo Image Capture device connected message appears disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it If the problem continues refer to the Image Capture s help 4 Select the option you want Scan and save your scanned image Ul E If scanning does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the latest version Scanning from network connected machine 1 Make sure that your machine is connected to a network 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 45 3 Start Applications and click Image Capture 4 According to OS follow steps below e For10 5 Click Devices gt Browse Devices on Menu bar Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your machine in Bonjour Devices e For 10 6 10 9 select your device below SHARED 5 Set the scan options on this program 6 Scan and save your scanned image a e If scanning does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the latest version For more information refer to the Image Capture s help You can also scan using TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop e You can scan using Samsung Scan Assistant software Open the Applications folder gt Sam
318. uments 348 printer 102 auto continue 60 storing requirements 159 loading paper in multi purpose tray 52 machine 355 acan 162 ordering an optional tray 235 paper 355 security tab 163 paper substitution 60 supplies 355 settings 161 setting the paper size and type 59 supplies settings tab 162 Tray 1 59 available supplies 234 UREK ACCESS CONRO lod tray setting 282 monitoring the supplies life 344 user protls ie TWAIN scan 117 ordering 234 whats I replacing toner cartridge 187 T U storing 355 UNIX SyncThruTM Web Service 159 IA kiki driver installation for network accounting 164 CHANG saan connected 317 address book tab 162 terminology 217 printing 91 application management 165 toner cartridge Unix configuring 163 redistributing toner 185 346 system requirements 255 Index usage counter 35 161 supplies 161 usb understanding the usb screen 242 USB cable driver installation 39 driver reinstallation 43 USB Drive how to manage 244 printing 243 user managing 164 profile 164 user access control 164 using help 73 88 W watermark create 78 delete 79 edit 79 print 78 Windows common Windows problems driver installation for network connected driver installation for USB cable connected driver reinstallation for USB cable connected printing scanning system requirements using SetIP wireless WPS disconnecting wireless network network cable WSD settings 227 312 39 42 62 107 253 323 3
319. uminity image and macine test functions Feature Description Power Saver Allows you to reduce energy consumption If you set this option the machine goes into power saving mode when not in use There are two power saving modes see Power Saver on page 284 Timers Allows you to set the time for machine to return to the default setting or cancel the held job if there is no input for an extended time see Timers administrator only on page 285 Eco Allows you to set the Eco mode as a default and change settings for Eco mode Using Eco mode can save printing resources see Eco on page 286 a Available for the administrator depending on the authentication settings selected see Authentication on page 289 Tray settings This feature allows you to check the current tray settings and change the settings if necessary There are many options available for setting the tray and paper Make the best use of the options to fit your needs for trays and paper 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 282 Machine KU You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click Settings tab gt Machine Settings gt System gt Input Trays 2 If some options are grayed out it means that the grayed out option is not supported for your machine or optional parts nee
320. uplex Enaga Finishing Origi Preview edit Preview edit mode appears when you tap the 1 31 Sided 100 Collated A mode play 88 button in the preview pane Adjust the prescanned image with operation functions such as rotate and crop O Letter cia E O A4 A D KU Some features are not available to preview edit mode Start Starts a job Preview Changing Darkness Display the originals type You can adjust the darkness level of a copy if needed for easier reading if the original contains faint markings or dark images Adjust the darkness level using Button Name Description E the control bar This feature allows you to print dark images lighter or light Setting View changed options list images darker O History 4 Copying 95 Understanding the copy screen Tap Darkness a to show the slider control Selecting the type of originals Use the original type setting to improve copy quality by selecting the appropriate document type for a copy job Text Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images Text Photo Use if the original is a mix of text and images Photo Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images Sub menu Action overflow Eco When Eco mode is enabled you can select only economical printing settings Tap the Eco option in the Action Overflow menu to turn Eco mode on or off Add to My Program Add an app to my program li
321. ure enabled printer see Setting the Wi Fi Direct for mobile printing on page 325 There are some apps that can be used with the NFC feature The apps can be downloaded from the Google Play Store e This feature is available only for the model with a NFC tag see Machine overview on page 20 Samsung Mobile Print Enables users to print scan Only users with the e Using a cover ora battery other than the ones that came with the mobile machine supports scan or fax Only users with the machine supports fax device or a metal cover sticker can block NFC photos documents and web pages directly from your smartphone or tablet If NFC devices keep failing to communicate see Using the Samsung Mobile Print App on page 334 KAG AS kai sa OF UG T PANG I agan Samsung Mobile Print Pro Helps users to get an authentication easily This Reinstall the battery from the mobile device then try again app provides one way of getting a user authentication using your mobile device see Using the Samsung Mobile Print Pro App on page 329 3 Network Setup gg Using the NFC feature Optional Samsung Mobile Print Manager Enables users to use cloning and wireless setup features using your mobile device see Using the Samsung Mobile KA If you want to create a new user or change the password see Security tab Print Manager App on page 331 on page 163 F 4 Tag your mobile device usually located on the back of the mobile Using
322. urrent alerts in the machine Use this information to troubleshoot machine errors Supplies You can check the supplies information For toner cartridges and imaging units supplies status is displayed with a visual graph showing you the amount of each supply left Page counts are also available which can help you predict when to change the supplies This feature is also available from the machine see Supplies Life on page 295 Usage Counters You can check the billing information and usage counter of the machine This feature is also available from the machine see Counter on page 35 Current Settings Shows the current settings of the machine and network Machine Information Shows the current machine settings Network Information Shows the current network settings Use this page as a reference and change the necessary settings needed for using the network Security Information Shows the current security settings of the machine and network Print Information You can print all the reports provided by your machine You can use these reports to help you maintain your machine This feature is also available in the machine see Report on page 295 You can manage the Box This feature is also available from the machine see Using Box on page 181 Forward Print Send Download You can manage the folder and files in Forward Print Send Download Add You can create Box in Print Send Download tab and Secured
323. urs on an envelope change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side Printing on seams can cause problems e If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page adjust the print resolution through your software application or in Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 66 Toner particles are around bold characters or pictures The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper e Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click the Paper tab and set the paper type to Recycled see Opening printing preferences on page 66 e Ensure the correct paper type is selected For example If Thicker Paper is selected but Plain Paper actually used an overcharging can occur causing this copy quality problem 9 Troubleshooting 220 i Solving other problems Condition Misformed characters AaBbGCc AaBbOc AaBbCOc AaBbCc AaBbOoc AaBbCoc Suggested Solutions If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images the paper stock may be too slick Try different paper see Print media specifications on page 249 If characters are improperly formed and producing a wavy effect the scanner unit may need service Cleaning the scan unit or contact a service representative Page skew Ensure that the paper is loaded properly Check the paper type and quality s
324. used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors As the number of bits increases the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map 1 bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem GDI and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform Glossary 366 Glossary BOOTP Coverage Bootstrap Protocol A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client BOOTP enables diskless workstation computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system CCD Charge Coupled Device CCD is a hardware which enables the scan job CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine Collation It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing For example 5 coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5 image or text on it So if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it the coverage will be higher and at the same time a toner usage will be as much as the coverage CSV
325. usty environment you need to clean your machine regularly to keep it in the best printing condition and use your machine longer A e Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol solvents or other strong substances can discolor or distort the cabinet e If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner we recommend you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it If you use a vacuum cleaner toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you Cleaning the outside Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint free cloth Dampen the cloth slightly with water but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine 4 Maintenance go Cleaning the machine Cleaning the inside During the printing process paper toner and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine This buildup can cause print quality problems such as toner specks or smearing Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems A To prevent damage to the toner cartridge do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes Cover it with a piece of paper if necessary Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area Use a dry lint free cloth when cleaning the inside of the machine be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts Do not use solvents such as benzene or thinn
326. ver in the Desktop screen you can download from the Samsung website www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or downloads e Ifyou want to install Samsung s printer management tools you need to install them using the supplied software CD Make sure that your computer is connected to the Internet and powered on Make sure that the machine is powered on Connect the computer and the machine with a USB cable The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update O N OC WU A Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop e ForMacOSX 10 8 double click the CD ROM that appears on Finder Double click the MAC Installer folder 5 Installer OS X icon Click Continue Read the license agreement and click Continue Click Agree to agree to the license agreement Click Install All components necessary for machine operations will be installed If you click Customize you can choose individual components to install 1 Introduction ao Installing the driver locally 9 Enter the password and click OK or Install Software 10 Select USB Connected Printer on the Printer Connection Type and click Continue Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer 11 NG ist 1 2 Click Continue 1 3 After the installation is finished click Close
327. vice files cannot be restored Confirm that you no longer need the data before deleting it 4 Tap E gt Print Options 10 Supplies and Accessories 244 Using a USB Drive device Deleting an image file 2 If the file is in a folder press the folder name 1 Insert a USB Drive device into the USB port on your machine 4 Tap E gt Format 5 Tap Format when the confirmation window appears Tap Box gt USB from the home screen or Apps 2 3 The machine shows all files in the USB Drive device Touch and hold folder or document you want to delete from the list K If the file is in a folder press the folder name 4 Tap Ba 5 Delete 5 Tap Delete when the confirmation window appears Formatting a USB Drive device 1 Insert a USB Drive device into the USB port on your machine 2 Tap Box gt USB from the home screen or Apps 3 The machine showss all files in the USB Drive device Touch and hold folder or document you want to delete from the list 10 Supplies and Accessories ga 11 Appendix This chapter provides product specifications and information concerning applicable regulations e Specifications e Regulatory information e Copyright i Specifications General specifications KU The specification values listed below are subject to change without notice See www samsung com for possible changes in information Items Description Dimensio
328. www samsung com ae support English INDIA KUWAIT 266 8282 Toll Free in support www samsung com noes 021 56997777 www samsung com ae_ar support Arabic NESIA R 08001128888 id support REEN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com kz_ru support IRAN 021 8255 www samsung com iran support LATVIA 8000 7267 www samsung com lv support 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com ITALIA 800 7267864 HHP it support LITHUANIA 8 800 77777 www samsung com 800 Msamsung 800 67267864 It support 1 800 234 7267 www samsung com LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www samsung com JAMAICA 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 aa support Englis a ere MACAU 0800 333 kaaa JAPAN ANA g co suppor ee MACEDONIA 023 207 777 0800 22273 www samsung com JORDAN MAHA levant support 1800 88 9999 www samsung com English MALAYSIA 603 77137477 Overseas my support contact 8 10 800 500 55 500 GSM 7799 www samsung com KALAKASILAN VIP care 7700 support MEXICO 01 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com mx support Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 361 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center WebSite Country Region NICARAGUA Customer Care Center 001 800 5077267 WebSite www samsung com latin support Spanish www samsung com latin_en support English NORWAY 815 56480 www samsung com no support OMAN 800 SAMSUNG 800 726 7864 www samsung com ae support English www samsung com ae_ar
329. xecutes authentication process based on the user information stored at LDAPserver LUI Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For LUI by default SWS Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For SWS by default Auto Logout You can use auto logout SyncThruAaProvider Executes authentication process based on the user information allocated from SWS LUI Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For LUI by default SWS Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For SWS by default 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 289 Admin Settings Auto Logout You can use auto logout Standard Accounting Only Allows users to login by entering ID and password ID PW Login You can login from ID amp Password ID Only Login You can login from ID only Secure Print You can login from secure print Accounting You can set usage limits for each user to use each feature if Standard accounting method is chosen see Authentication on page 289 KU You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click the Security tab gt User Access Control gt Accounting gt Accounting Methods see Security tab on page 163 No Accounting Select not to use this feature Standard Accounting Select to use the installed job accounting method SyncThruaA Provider Select to use the job account
330. y Multi purpose tray Plain Thick o e Thicker O Thin Cotton e e Types Tray 1 Optional tray Multi purpose tray Color Preprinted e Recycled Envelope Labels CardStock e Bond Archive e LetterHead Punched Supported Blank Not supported 9 The media types are shown in the Printing Preferences This paper type option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray This setting appears in the list so that you can select it This will let you get the best quality printout If not the desired print quality may not be achieved 2 Media and Tray 155 Printing on special media Do not use stamped envelopes Envelope e Donot use envelopes with clasps snaps windows coated lining self adhesive seals or other synthetic materials Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes a SL Kabo p j 7 7 p Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes h lef To print an envelope place it flap side down with the stamp area on the top left Basurathe seamiat bothvendear heenvslapsemandealltheway tothe corner of the envelope 1 Acceptable 2 Unacceptable side Envelopes with a peel off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine s fusing temperature about 170 C 338 F for 0 1 secon
331. y period For example if the duty cycle is 48 000 pages per month assuming 20 working days a printer limits 2 400 pages a day Glossary ga Glossary ECM EtherTalk Error Correction Mode ECM is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise Emulation A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking FDI Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system so that the second system behaves like the first system Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior which is in contrast to simulation which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated often considering its internal state Ethernet Ethernet is a frame based computer networking technology for local area networks LANs It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer and frame formats and protocols for the media access control MAC data link layer of the OSI model Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802 3 It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present Foreign Device Interface FDI
332. you need to enter the ID and Password set in the printer driver For secured fax you need to enter the Password Active Notice Displays any error messages and codes that have occurred 1 Introduction 34 Display screen and useful menu You can check how many pages jobs were printed copied scanned and faxed out You can check the counter by device or users Tap Counter from the home screen or Apps 2 You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click Information tab gt Usage Counters see Counter on page 35 Total Usage all Total Usage Total 26 used F Co A Send Usage m tro M cco E Fax Send Usage PSTN Si KO Ri ns 2 User Usage E Category Print Copy Fax Print Report Total Mono Simplex 1 20 0 3 24 Mono Duplex 0 2 0 0 2 Mono Eco Ratio 0 0 0 0 N A N A 0 0 Command keys Button Name Description Quick Menu Open the quick menu Search for a desired menu or app Q Search You can print a usage counter report Print My Program Open a list of the apps you added All Period Select the period of checking counter From To Set the period of checking counter Understanding the Counter menu Total Usage Each category shows the usage count by job types Print Copy Fax Print Report T
333. you should use the power cord supplied with the machine Otherwise it can cause damage or fire to the machine Connect the machine to the electricity supply first 2 You can also turn the machine on pressing the Power Wakeup A e Some parts inside of the machine may be hot when power is on or after printing Be careful not to burn yourself when working inside the machine Do not disassemble the machine when it is turned on or plugged in Doing so may give you an electric shock If you turn the machine off directly using the power switch it could cause the hard disk problem in the machine 1 Introduction 25 Understanding the LEDs The color of the status LED indicates the machine s current status L Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country see Control panel overview on page 23 To resolve the error look at the error message and its instructions from the troubleshooting part You also can resolve the error with the guideline from the computers Samsung Printer Status program window If the problem persists call a service representative Status LED Status Description Off e The machine is off line e The machine is in power save mode Blue On The machine is on line and can be used Blinking Fax The machine is sending or receiving faxes Copy The machine is copying documents Scan The machine is scanning documents Print e When the status LED slowly blinks
334. your network administrator or the person that set up your wireless network for information about your network configuration Your machine is a network compatible machine To enable your machine to work with your network you will need to perform some configuration procedures Items to prepare Access point Network connected computer Software CD that was provided with your machine A machine installed with a wireless network interface Network cable Printing a network configuration report You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network configuration report See Report on page 295 IP setting using SetIP Program Windows This program is used to manually set the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine The MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report See Network settings configuring TCP IP on page 306 3 Network Setup 323 Wireless network setup Optional Configuring the machine s wireless network 5 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens click Network Settings Before starting you will need to know the network name SSID of your wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted This information was set when the access point or wireless router was installed If you do not know about your 6 Click Wi Fi gt Wizard 7 Select the

Samsung SL-M4580FX User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents